WO2021197233A1 - 一种通信方法及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021197233A1
WO2021197233A1 PCT/CN2021/083367 CN2021083367W WO2021197233A1 WO 2021197233 A1 WO2021197233 A1 WO 2021197233A1 CN 2021083367 W CN2021083367 W CN 2021083367W WO 2021197233 A1 WO2021197233 A1 WO 2021197233A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal device
configuration information
paging
duration
information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/083367
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
邝奕如
徐海博
单宝堃
孔繁华
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202011636879.0A external-priority patent/CN113498165B/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21781906.9A priority Critical patent/EP4114102A4/en
Publication of WO2021197233A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021197233A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/005—Transmission of information for alerting of incoming communication
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
    • H04W68/04—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like multi-step notification using statistical or historical mobility data
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • the fifth generation (5G) new radio (NR) technology follows the discontinuous reception (DRX) mechanism in the long term evolution (LTE) system.
  • the DRX mechanism includes the DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device will periodically "wake up” for a period of time, and can remain in the "sleep" state at other times in the DRX cycle to reduce power consumption.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is in the radio resource control (RRC) idle state or the RRC inactive state, if the core network or base station needs to send downlink data to the terminal device, it will send it to the terminal device first.
  • a paging message is used to page a terminal device. After receiving the paging message, the terminal device initiates an RRC connection establishment process to receive downlink data. For a terminal device configured with DRX, it will "wake up” to receive a paging message at a paging occasion (PO) included in the DRX cycle.
  • PO paging occasion
  • extended DRX extended DRX
  • eDRX extended DRX
  • eDRX extended DRX
  • eDRX extended DRX
  • a paging transmission window is introduced in eDRX.
  • One eDRX cycle includes one PTW, and the PTW includes one or more POs.
  • a terminal device will "wake up” to receive a paging message at one or more POs in the PTW until it successfully receives a paging message containing the terminal device's identification number (ID) or the PTW ends .
  • ID identification number
  • the core network device configures paging parameters for the terminal device, such as configuring the duration of the PTW, and the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging parameter configured by the core network device.
  • the paging parameters configured by the core network device for the terminal device may not meet the actual needs of the terminal device. For example, the terminal device itself does not need to monitor paging messages frequently, but the PTW configured by the core network device for the terminal device has a long duration, which causes the terminal The device needs to monitor the paging message multiple times, which is not conducive to the energy saving of the terminal device.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to make the paging parameters configured by the network for the terminal device meet the actual requirements of the terminal device as much as possible.
  • a first communication method comprising: determining auxiliary information, the auxiliary information being used to determine a paging parameter configured for a terminal device; and sending the auxiliary information.
  • the method may be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device can send auxiliary information to the network device, and the network device can determine the paging parameter configured for the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information may indicate the status of the terminal device, etc., so that the paging parameters configured by the network device can better meet the actual needs of the terminal device. For example, for terminal devices that do not need to monitor paging messages frequently, the network device can configure a shorter paging transmission window for such terminal devices according to the auxiliary information, so that the terminal device monitors paging messages less often, which helps reduce the number of terminals.
  • the power consumption of the equipment realizes the energy saving of the terminal equipment.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes, for example, one or more of the following: the type information of the terminal device, the mobile status information of the terminal device, the location information of the terminal device, the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, and the paging transmission expected by the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes the type information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the mobile status information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the location information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device
  • the auxiliary information includes the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the period of the terminal device that monitors the PO in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the type of the terminal device Information and the location information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device and the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the length of the period during which the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window refers to the period during which the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in a paging transmission window
  • the length of the period can be the length of the period in the paging transmission window.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the content included in the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information may include other information in addition to the above information, or the auxiliary information does not include any of the above information, but includes other information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the third configuration information being determined according to the received configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is determined according to the configuration information received by the terminal device. For example, if the terminal device only receives the first configuration information, the third configuration information can be determined according to the first configuration information. For example, the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, or the third configuration information is the first configuration information. . For another example, if the terminal device only receives the second configuration information, the third configuration information can be determined according to the second configuration information. For example, the third configuration information is the same as the second configuration information, or the third configuration information is the second configuration. information. For another example, the terminal device receives the first configuration information and the second configuration information, so the third configuration information may be determined according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information; or the third configuration information is the same as the second configuration information; or the third configuration information is different from the first configuration information and the second configuration information, but the third configuration information is different from the first configuration information.
  • the configuration information is related to the second configuration information. That is, the terminal device may determine the third configuration information according to the received configuration information, and if the terminal device receives multiple pieces of configuration information, it may comprehensively determine the third configuration information according to the multiple pieces of configuration information.
  • the multiple configuration information comes from different devices, for example, the first configuration information comes from the core network device, the second configuration information comes from the access network device, or the first configuration information comes from the access network device, and the second configuration information comes from the core network device, etc. .
  • Different configuration information represents the configuration of the terminal device by different devices, and the terminal device comprehensively determines the third configuration information according to these multiple configurations, which can make the determined third configuration information more reasonable.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first number
  • the second The configuration information includes a second duration and/or a second quantity
  • the first duration and the second duration are both the duration of the paging transmission window
  • the first quantity and the second quantity are both in a page The number of paging occasions to be monitored in the transmission window.
  • the first configuration information includes, for example, one or more of the first duration, the first number, the first sequence number information, or the first period.
  • the first configuration information includes the first duration; or, the first configuration information includes the first number; or, the first configuration information includes the first sequence number information; or, the first configuration information includes the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first period.
  • the configuration information includes the first duration and the first number; or, the first configuration information includes the first duration and the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first number and the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first Duration, first quantity, first period, etc.
  • the first duration is the duration of a paging transmission window
  • the first quantity is the number of POs that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the first serial number information refers to what the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the sequence number of the PO (or referred to as an index or number, etc.).
  • the first period is the period in which the terminal device monitors the PO in a paging transmission window.
  • the duration of the first period may be an integer multiple of the interval between two adjacent POs in the paging transmission window.
  • the first configuration information may also include other information, which is not specifically limited.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • the terminal device may determine the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information. For example, if the third configuration information includes the third duration, the first configuration information includes the first duration, and the second configuration information includes the second duration, then the third duration is, for example, the smaller value of the first duration and the second duration. The power consumption of the terminal device is saved; or, the third duration is, for example, the larger value of the first duration and the second duration, so as to maximize the success rate of the terminal device in monitoring the paging message and reduce the probability of missed detection by the terminal device.
  • the third configuration information includes the third number
  • the first configuration information includes the first number
  • the second configuration information includes the second number
  • the third number is, for example, the smaller value of the first number and the second number, to The power consumption of the terminal device is saved; or, the third number is, for example, the larger value of the first number and the second number, so as to maximize the success rate of the terminal device in monitoring the paging message and reduce the probability of missed detection by the terminal device.
  • a second communication method is provided.
  • the method is applied to a network device.
  • the method includes: receiving auxiliary information, where the auxiliary information is used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device; and determining the second communication method according to the auxiliary information.
  • One configuration information, the first configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor paging messages; and the first configuration information is sent.
  • the method may be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the second communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device.
  • the second communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the method further includes:
  • Receiving second configuration information determining third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and sending a paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • the network device can send a paging message according to the first configuration information after determining the first configuration information. Or, if there are other network devices in addition to the network device that will also determine the configuration information, that is, the second configuration information, the network device can receive the second configuration information from the other network devices, and based on the first configuration information and The second configuration information determines the third configuration information to send the paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • the network device determines the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information
  • the terminal device according to the embodiment corresponding to the first aspect determines the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information
  • the method is the same, so that the third configuration information determined by the network device and the terminal device are the same, and the paging success rate is improved.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first quantity
  • the second configuration information includes a second duration and/or a second quantity
  • the first duration and the second duration are both paging transmissions
  • the first number and the second number are both the number of paging occasions that need to be monitored in a paging transmission window.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the network device is a core network device, and the method further includes:
  • the core network device can send the auxiliary information to the access network device, so that the access network device can also determine corresponding configuration information, such as second configuration information, according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device may also send the first configuration information to the access network device. For example, if the access network device does not determine the configuration information, the access network device may determine to page the terminal device according to the first configuration information; or, access The network device also determines the second configuration information, and the access network device may also determine the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
  • the network device is an access network device, and the method further includes:
  • the access network device may also send the first configuration information to the core network device. For example, if the core network device has not determined the configuration information, the core network device may determine that the terminal device is paged according to the first configuration information; or the core network device may also determine If the second configuration information is obtained, the core network device may also determine the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
  • a third communication method includes: determining that a first relaxation condition is satisfied, where the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxing monitoring of paging messages; and a first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition Monitoring the paging message, the number of times the terminal device monitors the paging message in the relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition is less than the number of times that the terminal device monitors the paging message in the normal configuration.
  • the method may be executed by a third communication device, and the third communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the third communication device is a terminal device, or a chip set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the third communication device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration.
  • the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the first relaxed configuration is less than the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the normal configuration. Since the number of times to monitor paging messages is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • whether the relaxation condition is satisfied can be determined by the terminal device itself, without instructions from the network device, making the determination method more flexible.
  • the first relaxation condition includes one or more of the following:
  • the change value of the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal is less than the first threshold
  • the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal is greater than the second threshold
  • the location of the terminal device is fixed.
  • the first relaxation condition may include one relaxation condition or multiple relaxation conditions. Wherein, if the first relaxation condition is a relaxation condition, the relaxation condition may include one or more of the above; or, if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, any of the multiple relaxation conditions One type may include one or more of the above, and the content included in different relaxation conditions among the multiple relaxation conditions may be the same or different.
  • the first relaxation condition includes a change in a measurement value obtained by measuring a reference signal during a first time period that is less than a first threshold; or, the first relaxation condition includes a measurement value obtained by measuring a reference signal during a second time period.
  • the first relaxation condition includes that the location of the terminal device is fixed; or, the first relaxation condition includes that the change in the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the first time period is less than the first threshold, and It includes that the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the second time period is greater than the second threshold; or, the first relaxation condition includes that the change value of the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the first time period is less than the first threshold, and The location of the terminal device is fixed, and so on.
  • the first relaxation condition may also include other conditions, which are not specifically limited, as long as the first relaxation condition can indicate that the state of the terminal device is relatively stable, or that the channel condition of the terminal device is better.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a third duration
  • the normal configuration includes a fourth duration
  • the third duration is less than the fourth duration
  • the third duration and the fourth duration are both of the paging transmission window Duration;
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a first number
  • the normal configuration includes a second number
  • the first number is less than the second number
  • both the first number and the second number are transmitted in one page The number of paging occasions to be monitored in the window.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a third duration, the third duration may be less than the fourth duration, and the fourth duration is the duration of a paging transmission window in the normal configuration.
  • the monitoring time of the terminal device can be reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device, and achieving the purpose of "relaxation".
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a first number, the first number may be less than the second number, and the second number is the number of paging occasions included in a paging transmission window in the normal configuration, or the terminal in the normal configuration The number of paging occasions that the device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window. By reducing the number of paging occasions that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window, the power consumption of the terminal device is reduced, and the purpose of "relaxation" is achieved.
  • the first number of paging occasions are the first N paging occasions in a time domain sequence within a paging transmission window, and N is the first number; and/or,
  • the first time interval is greater than the second time interval
  • the first time interval is the time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the first number of paging occasions
  • the second time interval is The time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the second number of paging occasions.
  • the first number of paging occasions is the number of paging occasions included in one paging transmission window under the first relaxed configuration.
  • the first number of paging occasions may be the first N paging occasions or the last N paging occasions (in time domain order) included in a paging transmission window under the normal configuration, so that the terminal device can achieve continuous Monitoring, reducing the power consumption caused by frequent switching between monitoring and non-monitoring; or, the first number of paging occasions can be any N paging occasions included in a paging transmission window under normal configuration , N is the first number, that is, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the time domain position of the first number of paging occasions.
  • the time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the time domain may be greater than in the second number of paging occasions, every two The time interval between adjacent paging occasions in the time domain (for example, called the second time interval), the second number of paging occasions is the number of paging occasions included in a paging transmission window under the normal configuration number. That is, the time interval between the first number of paging occasions is greater than the time interval between the second number of paging occasions.
  • the length of the paging transmission window is fixed, this also indicates that the first The number is less than the second number, so that the terminal device monitors the first number of paging occasions, which can reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device may send instruction information to the terminal device to indicate that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed. Therefore, whether the terminal device can relax monitoring paging messages is also within the control range of the network device as much as possible. For example, if the terminal device is in a state where the terminal device relaxes monitoring paging messages, the network device can also adjust the way of sending paging messages accordingly to improve the terminal The paging success rate of the device.
  • the indication information may indicate in an explicit manner that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed.
  • the indication information occupies one or more bits, and the one or more bits may indicate that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed.
  • the indication information occupies 1 bit as an example, if the value of this 1 bit is "1", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is allowed, and if the value of this 1 bit is "0", it indicates that loose monitoring is not allowed Paging message; or, if the value of this 1 bit is "0", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is allowed, and if the value of this 1 bit is "1", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is not allowed.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the core network device can send instruction information to the terminal device through a NAS message.
  • the NAS message used by the core network device to send the indication information is, for example, a registration acceptance message.
  • the registration acceptance message can also be used to configure eDRX related parameters for the terminal device, such as Configure eDRX period, etc.
  • the access network device can send indication information to the terminal device through an RRC message or other messages. For example, an RRC message is used to release the terminal device to the RRC inactive state or the RRC idle state. State RRC release message.
  • the access network device may also send the instruction information through a broadcast message.
  • a broadcast message is, for example, a system message, or may also be other messages.
  • the method further includes: receiving configuration information, the configuration information being used to configure the first relaxation condition, and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the indication information is used to configure the first relaxation condition and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition.
  • the indication information may indicate in an explicit manner that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed.
  • the network device may also send configuration information, and the terminal device may receive configuration information from the network device, and the configuration information may be configured by the network device.
  • the indication information indicates that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, the network device may send configuration information, and if the indication information indicates that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed, the network device may not need to send the configuration information.
  • the indication information may also indicate that it is allowed to relax listening to the paging message in an implicit indication manner. In this case, for example, the indication information is the configuration information.
  • the configuration information may be referred to as configuration information or indication information, and the configuration information may implicitly indicate that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages. It is equivalent to that the network device implicitly indicates that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages by sending configuration information. In this way, the terminal device is able to know the correspondence between the relaxation condition and the relaxation configuration without sending additional information as indication information, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the configuration information further includes a correspondence between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the configuration information may include one or more of the following: information about M types of relaxation conditions, information about N types of relaxation configurations, or the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations.
  • the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions; or, the configuration information includes information about N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes M Information about three types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions, and the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes N types of relaxation configurations Information, and the corresponding relationship between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions, information about N types of relaxation configurations, and the relationship between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations Correspondence between.
  • the configuration information can include the relaxation condition and N kinds of relaxation configurations, and there is no need to include the corresponding relationship between the relaxation conditions and the N kinds of relaxation configurations, because the relaxation conditions are naturally related to Corresponding to N kinds of relaxed configurations.
  • the configuration information may include M types of relaxation conditions, N types of relaxation configurations, and the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations, so that The terminal device clarifies which kind of relaxation condition corresponds to which kind of relaxation configuration.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device can send a request message to the network device when there is a need to save power consumption to request relaxing monitoring of paging messages, so that the terminal device’s relaxed monitoring of paging messages can better meet the needs of the terminal device, and also The network device can be made clear whether the terminal device is relaxing to monitor the paging message.
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the network device through a NAS message.
  • the NAS message is, for example, a registration request message, or may also be other NAS messages.
  • the terminal device can send request information to the network device through an RRC message or other messages.
  • an RRC message is a message for the terminal device to send auxiliary information to the network device, such as a UE auxiliary information message.
  • the auxiliary information described here includes, for example, the desired configuration of the terminal device, or includes the service information of the terminal device, or includes the desired configuration of the terminal device and the service information of the terminal device, and so on.
  • the service information of the terminal device includes the parameters of the service being performed by the terminal device, such as the type of service being performed by the terminal device or the bandwidth required by the service.
  • the configuration expected by the terminal device is, for example, the air interface configuration expected by the terminal device, such as the time slot format expected by the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • K types of relaxation conditions are not satisfied, the K types of relaxation conditions are all relaxation conditions or partial relaxation conditions, the first relaxation condition is one of the K types of relaxation conditions, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the non-satisfying K relaxation conditions mentioned here means that none of the K relaxation conditions are met, or in other words, any one of the K relaxation conditions is not met.
  • the K types of relaxation conditions include partial relaxation conditions or all relaxation conditions among the configured relaxation conditions.
  • the terminal device may periodically or aperiodically determine whether the K types of relaxation conditions are satisfied. For example, after determining that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, the terminal device monitors the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition. After that, the terminal device determines that the second relaxation condition among the K types of relaxation conditions is satisfied, and then the terminal device can change to monitor the paging message according to the second relaxation configuration corresponding to the second relaxation condition.
  • the terminal device can resume normal monitoring of paging messages, that is, the terminal device can be configured as normal Monitor paging messages to reduce the probability of missed paging messages.
  • the first relaxation condition is one of K kinds of relaxation conditions
  • the K kinds of relaxation conditions further include a second relaxation condition
  • the second relaxation condition corresponds to a second relaxation configuration
  • the first relaxation condition The configuration is different from the second relaxed configuration
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • the relaxation conditions can include multiple types, and the relaxation configurations corresponding to different relaxation conditions can be the same or different, which is more flexible.
  • K types of relaxation conditions include a first relaxation condition and a second relaxation condition.
  • the second relaxation condition corresponds to the second relaxation configuration.
  • the first relaxation configuration and the second relaxation configuration can be the same configuration, or the first relaxation configuration and the second relaxation configuration Second, the relaxed configuration can also be a different configuration.
  • a fourth communication method includes: determining that a terminal device is allowed to relax listening to a paging message; and sending instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate that a relaxed listening paging message is allowed.
  • the method may be executed by a fourth communication device, and the fourth communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip.
  • the fourth communication device is a network device, or a chip set in the network device for realizing the function of the network device, or other component used for realizing the function of the network device.
  • the fourth communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the terminal device also sends the capability information of the terminal device to the network device, or the network device obtains the capability information of the terminal device according to the registration information of the terminal device, and the capability information of the terminal device indicates that the terminal device has power saving requirements, the network device can If it is determined that the terminal device is allowed to relax monitoring the paging message, the indication information may indicate that the monitoring of the paging message is allowed to relax; and if the capability information of the terminal device indicates that the terminal device has no power saving requirement, the network device may determine that the terminal device is not allowed to relax If the paging message is monitored, the indication information may indicate that it is not allowed to relax monitoring the paging message. Or the network device may also determine whether to allow the terminal device to relax monitoring the paging message in other ways.
  • the behavior of the terminal device is as far as possible within the control range of the network device. For example, if the indication information indicates that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages, if the terminal device meets the corresponding relax condition, it can monitor the paging message according to the relax configuration corresponding to the relax condition. For example, if the terminal device meets the first relax condition, it can monitor the paging message according to the The first relaxation configuration corresponding to the relaxation condition monitors the paging message. The number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the first relaxed configuration is less than the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the normal configuration. Since the number of times to monitor paging messages is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced. Moreover, whether the corresponding relaxation conditions are met can be determined by the terminal device itself, without instructions from the network device, making the determination method more flexible.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the method further includes: sending configuration information, the configuration information being used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the instruction information is used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure a first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition;
  • the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxing monitoring of paging messages, and the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition is less than the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the normal configuration .
  • the configuration information further includes all The corresponding relationship between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the method further includes:
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the first communication device as described above.
  • the first communication device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the introduction is continued with the first communication device being a terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module as examples. in,
  • the processing module is used to determine auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information is used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device;
  • the transceiver module is used to send the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive first configuration information and/or second configuration information
  • the processing module is further configured to monitor the paging message according to the third configuration information, and the third configuration information is determined according to the received configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first quantity
  • the second configuration information includes a second duration and/or a second quantity
  • the first duration and the second duration are both paging transmissions
  • the first number and the second number are both the number of paging occasions that need to be monitored in a paging transmission window.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the second communication device as described above.
  • the second communication device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device may include a module for executing the second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the second communication device is a network device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the transceiver (or, transmitter and receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the second communication device is continued to be a network device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information is used to determine paging parameters configured for a terminal device;
  • the processing module is configured to determine first configuration information according to the auxiliary information, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor paging messages;
  • the transceiver module is also used to send the first configuration information.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to:
  • Receiving second configuration information determining third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and sending a paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first number
  • the second configuration information Including a second duration and/or a second quantity
  • the first duration and the second duration are both the duration of a paging transmission window
  • the first quantity and the second quantity are both within a paging transmission window The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the network device is a core network device
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send the auxiliary information and the first configuration information to an access network device serving the terminal device.
  • the network device is an access network device
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send the first relaxed configuration to a core network device serving the terminal device.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the aforementioned third communication device.
  • the third communication device is configured to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may include a module for executing the third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, for example, a processing module, and optionally, a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the third communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter
  • the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the third communication device is a chip set in the communication device
  • the transceiver (or, the transmitter and the receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the third communication device is continued to be a terminal device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the processing module is configured to determine that a first relaxation condition is satisfied, and the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxation of monitoring paging messages;
  • the transceiver module is configured to monitor paging messages according to the first relaxed configuration corresponding to the first relaxed condition, and the number of times that the terminal device monitors the paging message in the relaxed configuration corresponding to the first relaxed condition is less than in the normal Configure the number of times to monitor paging messages.
  • the first relaxation condition includes one or more of the following:
  • the change value of the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal is less than the first threshold
  • the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal is greater than the second threshold
  • the location of the terminal device is fixed.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a third duration
  • the normal configuration includes a fourth duration
  • the third duration is less than the fourth duration
  • the third duration and the fourth duration are both of the paging transmission window Duration;
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a first number
  • the normal configuration includes a second number
  • the first number is less than the second number
  • both the first number and the second number are transmitted in one page The number of paging occasions to be monitored in the window.
  • the first number of paging occasions are the first N paging occasions in a time domain sequence within a paging transmission window, and N is the first number; and/or,
  • the first time interval is greater than the second time interval
  • the first time interval is the time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the first number of paging occasions
  • the second time interval is The time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the second number of paging occasions.
  • the transceiver module is also used to receive indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate that it is allowed to relax listening to the paging message.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive configuration information, where the configuration information is used to configure the first relaxation condition and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the indication information is used to configure the first relaxation condition and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition.
  • the configuration information further includes the corresponding relationship between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the transceiver module is also used to send request information, and the request information is used to request relaxation monitoring of paging messages.
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • the processing module is also used to determine that K types of relaxation conditions are not satisfied, the K types of relaxation conditions are all relaxation conditions or partial relaxation conditions, and the first relaxation condition is one of the K types of relaxation conditions, K Is an integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the transceiver module is also used to monitor paging messages according to the normal configuration.
  • the first relaxation condition is one of K kinds of relaxation conditions
  • the K kinds of relaxation conditions further include a second relaxation condition
  • the second relaxation condition corresponds to a second relaxation configuration
  • the first relaxation condition The configuration is different from the second relaxed configuration
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the fourth communication device is used to execute the method in the foregoing fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner.
  • the fourth communication device may include a module for executing the method in the fourth aspect or any possible implementation manner, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the transceiver module may include a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module and the receiving module may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the fourth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the fourth communication device is a network device.
  • the transceiver module may also be implemented by a transceiver, and the processing module may also be implemented by a processor.
  • the sending module may be implemented by a transmitter, and the receiving module may be implemented by a receiver.
  • the transmitter and the receiver may be different functional modules, or may be the same functional module, but can implement different functions.
  • the fourth communication device is a communication device
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip set in the communication device
  • the transceiver (or, the transmitter and the receiver) is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • the fourth communication device is continued to be a network device, and the processing module and the transceiver module are used as examples for the introduction. in,
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the terminal device is allowed to relax monitoring paging messages
  • the transceiver module is configured to send instruction information, and the instruction information is used to indicate that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send configuration information, where the configuration information is used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the instruction information is used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure a first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition;
  • the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxing monitoring of paging messages, and the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition is less than the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the normal configuration .
  • the configuration information further includes all The corresponding relationship between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive request information from the terminal device, and the request information is used to request relaxation of monitoring paging messages.
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the first communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors, and optionally, may also include a communication interface, which may be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • the first communication device may further include one or more memories for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the first aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device may not include a memory, and at least one memory may be located outside the first communication device.
  • One or more processors, one or more memories, and communication interfaces are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the first aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device may further include one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs are stored in one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include computer instructions.
  • the first communication device is caused to execute the method in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output pins, etc., and the communication interface is connected to the radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the second communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors, and optionally, may also include a communication interface, which may be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • the second communication device may further include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the second aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the second communication device may not include a memory, and one or more memories may be located outside the second communication device.
  • One or more processors, one or more memories, and communication interfaces are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the second aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the second communication device may further include one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs are stored in one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include computer instructions.
  • the second communication device is caused to execute the method in the second aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or transmitter and receiver) in the communication device.
  • the transceiver is realized by the antenna, feeder, and Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the aforementioned third communication device.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors, and optionally, may also include a communication interface, which may be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • the third communication device may further include one or more memories for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing third aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may not include a memory, and one or more memories may be located outside the third communication device.
  • One or more processors, one or more memories, and communication interfaces are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the third aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the third communication device may further include one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs are stored in one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include computer instructions.
  • the third communication device is caused to execute the method in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface is realized by a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device, for example, for example, the transceiver is realized by an antenna, a feeder and a receiver in the communication device. Codec and other implementations.
  • the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes one or more processors, and optionally, may also include a communication interface, which may be used to communicate with other devices or equipment.
  • the fourth communication device may further include a memory for storing computer instructions.
  • One or more processors and one or more memories are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the fourth aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the fourth communication device may not include a memory, and one or more memories may be located outside the fourth communication device.
  • One or more processors, one or more memories, and communication interfaces are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the fourth aspect or various possible implementation manners.
  • the fourth communication device may further include one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs are stored in one or more memories, and the one or more computer programs include computer instructions.
  • the fourth communication device is caused to execute the foregoing fourth aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners.
  • the fourth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the network device is a core network device or an access network device.
  • the communication interface is realized by, for example, a transceiver (or a transmitter and a receiver) in the communication device.
  • the transceiver is realized by the antenna, feeder, and Codec and other implementations.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the communication interface is, for example, an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin, etc., and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to Information is sent and received through radio frequency transceiver components.
  • a first communication system includes the communication device described in the fifth aspect or the communication device described in the ninth aspect, and the communication device described in the sixth aspect or the communication device described in the tenth aspect. ⁇ Communication device.
  • a second communication system includes the communication device according to the seventh aspect or the communication device according to the eleventh aspect, and the communication device according to the eighth aspect or the twelfth aspect The communication device.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer can execute the third aspect or the third aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer can execute the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided.
  • the computer program product is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • the network device may determine the paging parameter configured for the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information may indicate the status of the terminal device, etc., so that the paging parameters configured by the network device can better meet the actual needs of the terminal device.
  • Figure 1A is an example of a terminal device receiving a paging message according to an eDRX cycle
  • FIG. 1B is another example of the terminal device receiving a paging message according to the eDRX cycle
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the first communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram of the remaining power of the terminal device
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the remaining power of the terminal device after a period of time without using the method provided in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of the remaining power of the terminal device after a period of time using the method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of the first terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of the first network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of terminal device according to an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is still another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 15 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • Terminal devices including devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data connectivity Sexual equipment.
  • it may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber unit station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • M2M/MTC Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit station
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • user terminal user terminal
  • user Agent user agent
  • user equipment user device
  • it may include mobile phones (or “cellular” phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, mobile devices with built-in computers, and so on.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • PCS cordless phones
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistants
  • restricted devices such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be regarded as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, for example, the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • OBU on-board unit
  • the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the terminal is a terminal device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • Network equipment including, for example, access network (AN) equipment, such as a base station (e.g., access point), which may refer to equipment that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network
  • AN access network
  • a base station e.g., access point
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • the base station can be used to convert the received air frame and IP packet to each other, as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include the IP network.
  • the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity that supports V2X applications, and can exchange messages with other entities that support V2X applications.
  • the network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include the LTE system or the evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in the long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A), or may also include the fifth-generation mobile Communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G) NR system (also referred to as NR system) next generation node B (next generation node B, gNB) or may also include cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, Cloud RAN) system Centralized unit (CU) and distributed unit (DU) in, the embodiment of the present application is not limited.
  • 5G 5th generation
  • NR system also referred to as NR system
  • next generation node B next generation node B
  • cloud radio access network cloud radio access network
  • Cloud RAN Centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the network equipment may also include core network equipment.
  • the core network equipment includes, for example, access and mobility management functions (AMF) or user plane functions (UPF) in the 5G system. Etc., or include the mobility management entity (mobility management entity, MME) in the 4G system.
  • AMF access and mobility management functions
  • UPF user plane functions
  • MME mobility management entity
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the network equipment is a network device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal device can periodically enter the sleep state without monitoring the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • eDRX Enhanced discontinuous reception
  • eDRX has a longer cycle, that is, the terminal device can periodically "sleep" for a longer period of time and then "wake up” again.
  • One eDRX cycle includes one paging transmission window (PTW), and the PTW includes one or more POs.
  • the terminal device will "wake up” to monitor the PDCCH at one or more POs in the PTW, and does not need to monitor the PDCCH during the "sleep" time.
  • the terminal equipment has 3 RRC states: RRC connected state, RRC idle state and RRC inactive state.
  • RRC connected state (or, can also be referred to as connected state for short.
  • connected state and “RRC connected state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the network, and it can Perform data transfer.
  • RRC idle state (or, can also be referred to as idle state for short.
  • idle state and “RRC idle state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, and the base station The context of the terminal device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process.
  • RRC inactive state (or, it can also be called RRC inactive state, or simply inactive state or inactive state.
  • inactive state “inactive state”, “inactive state”, “inactive state”, ““Deactivated state”, “inactive state”, “RRC inactive state” or “RRC deactivated state”, etc., are the same concept, these terms can be interchanged): the terminal equipment has entered the RRC connection at the anchor base station before Then the anchor base station releases the RRC connection, but the anchor base station saves the context of the terminal device. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state again from the RRC inactive state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection recovery process (or called the RRC connection re-establishment process) at the base station where it currently resides.
  • RRC connection recovery process or called the RRC connection re-establishment process
  • the base station where the terminal device currently resides and the anchor base station of the terminal device may be the same base station or different base stations.
  • the RRC recovery process has shorter time delay and lower signaling overhead.
  • the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • first and second are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, and timing of multiple objects. , Priority or importance, etc.
  • first configuration information and the second configuration information are only for distinguishing different configuration information, but do not indicate the difference in content, priority, or importance of the two configuration information.
  • the 5G NR technology follows the DRX mechanism in the LTE system.
  • the DRX mechanism includes the DRX cycle.
  • the terminal device in the RRC connected state will periodically "wake up” for a period of time during the DRX cycle.
  • the time for the terminal device to "wake up” is called the on duration time period.
  • the terminal device can remain in the "sleep" state to reduce power consumption.
  • the core network or base station if the core network or base station needs to send downlink data to the terminal device, for example, a phone needs to call into the terminal device, or there is downlink data that needs to be sent to the terminal device.
  • the core network or base station will first send a paging message to the terminal device for paging the terminal device. After receiving the paging message, the terminal device initiates an RRC connection establishment process to receive downlink data.
  • the terminal device in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state only "woke up" to receive paging messages in its own PO.
  • the terminal device in its own PO first receives downlink control information (downlink control information, DCI) used to indicate a paging message, and the DCI may be sent on a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • the DCI may also be called paging control information, and the paging control information is used to indicate the time-frequency resource for sending the paging message.
  • the terminal device After receiving the paging control information, the terminal device receives the paging message. If the paging message carries the ID of the terminal device, it means that the terminal device is paged, and the terminal device needs to initiate the RRC connection establishment process to access the base station. Receive downlink data. Or, if the ID of the terminal device is not carried in the paging message, it means that the terminal device is not paged, and the terminal device can continue to "sleep" and wait until the next PO to "wake
  • the PO included in the DRX cycle will "wake up" to receive a paging message.
  • the eDRX mechanism is introduced to the DRX mechanism.
  • eDRX is equivalent to extending the DRX cycle to a larger value, that is, the terminal device can "sleep" for a longer time and “wake up” again. Since the terminal device "sleeps" for a longer time under the eDRX mechanism, it needs to ensure higher reliability every time it "wake up” to receive a paging message to avoid the delay caused by one more eDRX cycle. Therefore, the eDRX Introduced PTW.
  • One eDRX cycle includes one PTW, and the PTW includes one or more POs.
  • the terminal device will "wake up" to receive a paging message at one or more POs in the PTW. Among them, the terminal device can first monitor the paging control information at each PO, and if it monitors the paging control information , The terminal device can continue to monitor the paging message in the PO.
  • the terminal device does not need to monitor the remaining PO in the PTW, and if the paging message does not include the terminal device ID, the terminal device waits until the next PO, and then monitors the paging control information, and so on, until the paging message containing the terminal device ID is successfully received or the PTW ends; and if the terminal device is in a PO If the paging control information is not monitored, the terminal device does not monitor the paging message at the PO, but waits until the next PO, and then monitors the paging control information, and so on, until it successfully receives the paging message containing the ID of the terminal device. Until the end of the call message or the PTW.
  • the core network device configures paging parameters for the terminal device, such as configuring the duration of the PTW, and the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging parameter configured by the core network device.
  • the paging parameters configured by the core network device for the terminal device may not meet the actual needs of the terminal device. For example, the terminal device itself does not need to monitor paging messages frequently, but the PTW configured by the core network device for the terminal device has a long duration, which causes the terminal The device needs to monitor the paging message multiple times, which is not conducive to the energy saving of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 1A is an example in which a terminal device receives a paging message according to an eDRX cycle.
  • Fig. 1A takes a PTW including 5 POs as an example, and Fig. 1A shows 3 PTWs.
  • the upper part of FIG. 1A represents the corresponding part of the base station or core network equipment, and the lower part represents the corresponding part of the terminal equipment.
  • the base station or core network device sends paging control information to the PO in the second PTW, and the terminal device fails to detect the paging control information in the first PO in the second PTW, but the terminal device fails to detect the paging control information in the second PTW.
  • the PO successfully detects the paging control information (as shown by the arrow in FIG. 1A), and detects the paging message containing the ID of the terminal device.
  • Figure 1A uses the paging control information to page the terminal device as an example.
  • the terminal device may not need to detect in the remaining 3 POs in the second PTW.
  • the boxes represent 3 POs that the terminal device does not need to detect. If the paging control information does not page the terminal device, that is, the paging message does not contain the ID of the terminal device, the terminal device needs to continue to detect in the remaining PO in the second PTW.
  • FIG. 1B is another example in which a terminal device receives a paging message according to an eDRX cycle.
  • Fig. 1B also takes a PTW including 5 POs as an example, and Fig. 1B shows 3 PTWs.
  • the upper part of FIG. 1B represents the corresponding part of the base station or the core network equipment, and the lower part represents the corresponding part of the terminal equipment.
  • the base station or the core network did not send any paging control information and paging messages in the three PTWs, that is, they did not page any terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment still needs to detect paging control information in each of the three PTWs.
  • the paging control information and paging messages sent by the base station or core network device in the three PTWs are not sent to the terminal device 1, that is, there may be paging messages sent to other terminal devices except the terminal device 1. Call the news. However, since the terminal device 1 has not detected the paging message containing the ID of the terminal device 1, the terminal device 1 still needs to detect the paging control information in each of the three PTWs.
  • the current paging mechanism is not conducive to the energy saving of terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device can send auxiliary information to the network device, and the network device can determine the paging parameter configured for the terminal device according to the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information may indicate the status of the terminal device, etc., so that the paging parameters configured by the network device can better meet the actual needs of the terminal device.
  • the network device can configure a shorter paging transmission window for such terminal devices according to the auxiliary information, so that the terminal device monitors paging messages less often, that is, the terminal device is in
  • the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in this configuration is less than the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the normal configuration. As the number of times to monitor paging messages is reduced, it helps to reduce the power consumption of the terminal device and realize the energy saving of the terminal device. .
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to the 4th generation (4G) mobile communication technology (the 4th generation, 4G) system, such as the LTE system, or can be applied to the 5G system, such as the NR system, or can also be applied to the next generation of mobile communications.
  • 4G 4th generation
  • 5G such as the NR system
  • System or other similar communication systems there are no specific restrictions.
  • FIG. 2 is an application scenario of an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 2 includes access network equipment, core network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • the access network device can page the terminal device, and the core network device can also page the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment and core network equipment for example, work in the evolved universal mobile communication system terrestrial radio access (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) system, or work in the NR system, or work in the next-generation communication system Or in other communication systems.
  • E-UTRA evolved universal mobile communication system terrestrial radio access
  • NR next-generation communication system
  • next-generation communication system Or in other communication systems.
  • the core network equipment in FIG. 2 is, for example, the MME in the 4G system, or the AMF in the 5G system, or may also be the corresponding core network equipment in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the access network device in FIG. 2 is, for example, a base station.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • a 4G system it can correspond to an eNB
  • a 5G system it corresponds to an access network equipment in 5G, such as gNB.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems. Therefore, the access network equipment in FIG. 2 can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems.
  • Figure 2 takes the access network device as a base station as an example.
  • the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
  • the terminal device in FIG. 2 uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the mobile phone.
  • the paging transmission window is, for example, PTW, or may have other names, as long as the paging transmission window includes one or more paging occasions for receiving paging messages.
  • the paging transmission window can also be understood as a time window, and the time window may include one or more POs.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication method. Please refer to FIG. 3, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in the RRC idle state, and the paging described below can be regarded as a paging initiated by a core network device.
  • the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. This is because the embodiment of this application is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example. Therefore, the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2, and the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device described in the following may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device determines auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information can be used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes, for example, one or more of the following: the type information of the terminal device, the mobile status information of the terminal device, the location information of the terminal device, the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, and the paging transmission expected by the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes the type information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the mobile status information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the location information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device
  • the auxiliary information includes the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the period of the terminal device that monitors the PO in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the type of the terminal device Information and the location information of the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device and the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device; or, the auxiliary information includes the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the length of the period during which the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in a paging transmission window may be an integer multiple of the interval between two adjacent POs in the paging transmission window.
  • the type information of the terminal device can indicate the motion state of the terminal device.
  • the type information of the terminal device may indicate that the terminal device is a camera with a fixed position. According to the type information of the terminal device, it can be determined whether the terminal device is in a fixed position. If the position of the terminal device is fixed, the terminal device can be considered to be in a static state. If the position of the terminal device is not fixed, the terminal device can be considered to be in a mobile state, or the terminal device may be considered Is on the move.
  • the channel condition of the terminal device is relatively stable, and it may not need to monitor multiple times to receive paging messages normally; and if the location of the terminal device is not fixed, or It is said that if the terminal device is in a mobile state or may be in a mobile state, the channel condition of the terminal device may not be stable enough, and it may require more monitoring to ensure normal reception of paging messages.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device may indicate the mobile state of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device may indicate that the terminal device is in a stationary state or a moving state, or may indicate the current speed of the terminal device, or may indicate that the terminal device is currently in a high-speed or low-speed moving state, where exactly what speed is " Which speed is “low speed” for “high speed” needs to be configured in advance.
  • the channel condition of the terminal device is relatively stable, and it may not need to monitor multiple times to receive paging messages normally; and if the terminal device If the device is in a mobile state, or the speed of the terminal device is high, or the terminal device is in a high-speed mobile state, the channel condition of the terminal device may not be stable enough, and it may require more monitoring to ensure normal reception of paging messages.
  • the location information of the terminal device may indicate the location of the terminal device in the cell where the terminal device currently resides, for example, indicates that the terminal device is located in the central area or the edge area of the cell where the terminal device currently resides. If the terminal device is in the central area of the cell where it currently resides, the channel condition of the terminal device is relatively stable, and it may not need to monitor multiple times to receive paging messages normally; and if the terminal device is in the edge area of the cell where it currently resides , The channel condition of the terminal device may not be stable enough, and it may require more monitoring to ensure normal reception of paging messages.
  • the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is, for example, the duration of the paging transmission window (for example, the duration of a paging transmission window) determined by the terminal device according to the current state of the terminal device and is expected to be configured for the terminal device.
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device may be less than the length of a PTW in the current normal configuration, or equal to the length of a PTW in the current normal configuration, or may be greater than the length of a PTW in the current normal configuration.
  • the normal configuration described in the embodiment of the present application refers to the paging configuration of the terminal device in the prior art, that is, the network in the prior art does not refer to the paging parameter configured for the terminal device with the auxiliary information.
  • the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is, for example, the number of POs that need to be monitored in a paging transmission window that the terminal device determines according to the current state of the terminal device and is expected to be configured for the terminal device.
  • the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device may be less than the number of POs included in a PTW in the current normal configuration, or equal to the number of POs included in a PTW in the current normal configuration.
  • the number of POs may be greater than the number of POs included in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the period during which the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window is, for example, the period determined by the terminal device according to the current state of the terminal device and is expected to be configured for the terminal device to monitor the PO in a paging transmission window.
  • the period that the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window may be less than the period that the terminal device monitors the PO in a PTW under the current normal configuration, or is equal to the period that the terminal device monitors the PO in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the period of the internal monitoring of the PO may also be greater than the period of the terminal device monitoring the PO in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the period for a terminal device to monitor PO in a PTW is 1 DRX cycle (introduced in the previous article, compared with DRX, eDRX has a longer cycle, that is, the length of the eDRX cycle is greater than that of DRX.
  • the length of the cycle is understood to mean that the length of one eDRX cycle is equal to the length of multiple DRX cycles, and in the PTW included in one eDRX cycle, the interval between two adjacent POs is one DRX cycle),
  • the period for the terminal device to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window is, for example, 2 DRX cycles, or 1 DRX cycle, or 0.5 DRX cycle.
  • the auxiliary information may include the state information of the terminal device, such as the type information of the terminal device, the movement state information of the terminal device, or the location information of the terminal device, etc., which can all be regarded as the state information of the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information may include desired configuration information of the terminal device, such as the length of the paging transmission window desired by the terminal device, the number of POs in the paging transmission window desired by the terminal device, or the desired configuration information of the terminal device in the paging transmission window. The period of internal monitoring of the PO, etc., can all be regarded as the desired configuration information of the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information may be used to determine the paging parameters configured for the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information may be used to determine the paging transmission window configured for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the core network device, and the core network device receives the auxiliary information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may include the auxiliary information in a non-access stratum (non-access stratum, NAS) message and send it to the core network device.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the NAS message is, for example, a registration request (registeration request) message, or may also be another NAS message, for example, it may be a NAS message after registration is completed.
  • the core network device determines the first configuration information according to the auxiliary information.
  • the first configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor the paging message.
  • the first configuration information can be understood as a paging parameter configured by the core network device for the terminal device, or as paging. Call configuration.
  • the first configuration information described in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as second configuration information.
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information according to the auxiliary information.
  • the first configuration information may also be referred to as the first relaxed configuration. That is to say, the power required for the terminal device to monitor the paging message under the first configuration information is less than the power required for the terminal device to monitor the paging message under the normal configuration, which is compared to the mechanism of the terminal device for monitoring the paging message normally.
  • the terminal device it is a kind of "relaxation" for the terminal device to monitor the paging message under the first configuration information, so it is called “relaxed configuration".
  • the first configuration information may also be referred to as the first tightening configuration. That is to say, the power required for the terminal device to monitor paging messages under the first configuration information is greater than the power required for the terminal device to monitor paging messages under the normal configuration, which is compared to the mechanism of the terminal device for monitoring paging messages normally.
  • the terminal device monitoring the paging message under the first configuration information is a kind of "tightening" for the terminal device, so it is called “tightening configuration".
  • the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages under the first configuration information refers to the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in a paging transmission window under the first configuration information; the terminal device monitors paging messages under the normal configuration.
  • the number of paging messages refers to the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in a paging transmission window under normal configuration.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes one or more of the first duration, the first quantity, the first sequence number information, or the first period.
  • the first configuration information includes the first duration; or, the first configuration information includes the first number; or, the first configuration information includes the first sequence number information; or, the first configuration information includes the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first period.
  • the configuration information includes the first duration and the first number; or, the first configuration information includes the first duration and the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first number and the first period; or, the first configuration information includes the first Duration, first quantity, first period, etc.
  • the first duration is the duration of a paging transmission window
  • the first quantity is the number of POs that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the first serial number information refers to what the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the sequence number of the PO (or referred to as an index or number, etc.).
  • the first period is the period in which the terminal device monitors the PO in a paging transmission window.
  • the duration of the first period may be an integer multiple of the interval between two adjacent POs in the paging transmission window.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device may also include other information, which is not specifically limited.
  • the first duration may be less than, equal to, or greater than the fourth duration, which is the duration of a paging transmission window. If the first configuration information includes the first number and the normal configuration includes the fourth number, the first number can be less than, equal to, or greater than the fourth number. The fourth number is the PO that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window. The number of. If the first configuration information includes the first period and the normal configuration includes the fourth period, the duration of the first period may be less than, equal to, or greater than the duration of the fourth period. The fourth period is when the terminal device is in a paging transmission window. The period of the internal monitoring PO.
  • the sequence number indicated by the first sequence number information may be the same as the sequence number indicated by the fourth sequence number information, or The sequence number indicated by one sequence number information is more than the sequence number indicated by the fourth sequence number information, or the sequence number indicated by the first sequence number information is less than the sequence number indicated by the fourth sequence number information.
  • the fourth sequence number information refers to the sequence number (or called index or number, etc.) of the PO that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window.
  • the core network device needs to determine the first configuration information for the terminal device according to the state information of the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the type information of the terminal device, the movement status information of the terminal device, or the location information where the terminal device is located, and the core network device may determine the first configuration information according to the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information includes type information of the terminal device, and the core network device can determine whether the terminal device is in a fixed position according to the type information of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may not need to listen to paging messages multiple times; and if the location of the terminal device is not fixed, or if the terminal device is in a mobile state or may be in a In the mobile state, the terminal device may need to monitor the paging message more times (for example, it needs to monitor the paging message normally, or monitor the paging message more frequently).
  • the auxiliary information includes the movement state information of the terminal device
  • the core network device can determine the movement state of the terminal device according to the movement state information of the terminal device. If the terminal device is in a static state, or the speed of the terminal device is low, or the terminal device is in a low-speed moving state, the terminal device may not need to monitor paging messages multiple times; and if the terminal device is in a mobile state, or the speed of the terminal device If it is higher, or the terminal device is in a high-speed moving state, the terminal device may need to monitor the paging message more times (for example, it needs to monitor the paging message normally, or monitor the paging message more frequently).
  • the auxiliary information includes location information of the terminal device
  • the core network device can determine the location of the terminal device in the cell where the terminal device currently resides according to the location information of the terminal device. If the terminal device is in the central area of the cell where it currently resides, the terminal device may not need to monitor the paging message multiple times; and if the terminal device is in the edge area of the cell where it currently resides, the terminal device may need to monitor multiple times. Paging messages (for example, you need to monitor paging messages normally, or monitor paging messages more frequently).
  • the core network device determines that the terminal device does not need to monitor paging messages multiple times, or that the terminal device does not need to monitor paging messages frequently, then, if the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first duration, the first duration is, for example, It is less than the duration of a PTW under the current normal configuration. Alternatively, if the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first number, the first number may be less than the number of POs included in one PTW under the current normal configuration. Or, if the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first sequence number information, the sequence number indicated by the first sequence number information includes, for example, the sequence numbers of some POs monitored in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the duration of the first cycle is, for example, less than the duration of the cycle of monitoring the PO in one PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the serial number indicated by the first serial number information may include the serial number of the first half of the PO in a PTW, but not the serial number of the second half of the PO in a PTW; or include the first and the serial number of the PO in a PTW.
  • the sequence number of the last PO does not include the sequence numbers of other POs in a PTW. It should be emphasized that the PO sequence numbers included here are indicated to the UE by the network, but there is no restriction on which PO sequence numbers are indicated to the UE.
  • the period during which a terminal device monitors PO in a PTW is a DRX cycle (it can be understood that the length of an eDRX cycle is equal to the length of multiple DRX cycles, and the PTW included in an eDRX cycle , The interval between two adjacent POs is one DRX cycle), then the first cycle is, for example, 2 DRX cycles or 3 DRX cycles.
  • the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to monitor paging messages more times (for example, it needs to monitor paging messages normally, or monitor paging messages more frequently), then if the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first Duration, the first duration is, for example, equal to the duration of one PTW in the current normal configuration, or the first duration may also be greater than the duration of one PTW in the current normal configuration. Or, if the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first number, the first number is, for example, equal to the number of POs included in a PTW under the current normal configuration, or the first number can also be greater than the current number. The number of POs included in a PTW in a normal configuration.
  • the duration of the first cycle is, for example, equal to the length of the cycle for listening to PO in a PTW under the current normal configuration, or the duration of the first cycle is also It can be greater than the length of the period of monitoring the PO in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first sequence number information
  • the sequence number indicated by the first sequence number information includes, for example, the sequence numbers of all POs monitored in a PTW under the current normal configuration.
  • the duration of the first cycle may also include the sequence numbers of all POs monitored in a PTW under the current normal configuration, and the sequence numbers of more POs. For example, if according to the current normal configuration, the period during which the terminal device monitors the PO in one PTW is one DRX cycle, then the first period is, for example, 0.5 DRX cycle.
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information for the terminal device according to the configuration information expected by the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes one of the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, or the period of monitoring POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, etc.
  • the core network device can determine the first configuration information according to the auxiliary information.
  • the core network device may determine the configuration information desired by the terminal device as the first configuration information, or the core network may also combine other factors, such as the capability information of the terminal device, etc., to finally determine the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information determined in this case may be the same as or different from the configuration information expected by the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information includes the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information according to the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device. For example, the core network device determines the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device as the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes the first duration, and the first duration is equal to the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information in combination with other factors.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes a first duration, and the first duration is equal to the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, or the first duration It may also be longer or shorter than the duration of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device may also include other information, for example, including the first number or the first period, which is not specifically limited.
  • the auxiliary information includes the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information according to the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device. For example, the core network device determines the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device as the first configuration information, then the first configuration information includes the first number, and the first number is equal to the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device The number of POs.
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information in combination with other factors.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes a first number, and the first number is equal to the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the first duration may also be greater or less than the number of POs in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device may also include other information, such as the first duration or the first period, which is not specifically limited.
  • the auxiliary information includes a period for the terminal device to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information according to the period for the terminal device to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window. For example, the core network device determines the period during which the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window as the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes the first period. The length of the period for monitoring the PO in the transmission window.
  • the core network device may determine the first configuration information in combination with other factors. For example, the first configuration information determined by the core network device includes the first period, and the duration of the first period is equal to the terminal device's expectation of listening to PO in the paging transmission window.
  • the duration of the cycle, or the duration of the first cycle may also be greater or less than the duration of the cycle that the terminal device expects to monitor the PO in the paging transmission window.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device may also include other information, such as the first duration or the first number, etc., which is not specifically limited.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device may be different.
  • the content included in the auxiliary information is different, which may mean that the types of parameters included in the auxiliary information are different.
  • one piece of auxiliary information includes the type information of the terminal device, and the other piece of auxiliary information includes the location information of the terminal device, it is considered that the contents of the two auxiliary information are different; for another example, one piece of auxiliary information includes the paging transmission expected by the terminal device
  • the length of the window, and the other auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device and the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device. It is considered that the content included in the two auxiliary information is different.
  • the content included in the auxiliary information is different, which may also mean that the values of the same parameter included in the auxiliary information are different.
  • one piece of auxiliary information includes the type information of the terminal device, and the other piece of auxiliary information also includes the type information of the terminal device, but the content included in the two types of information is different, it is considered that the content included in the two auxiliary information is different; for another example ,
  • One auxiliary information includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, and the other auxiliary information also includes the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device, but the two lengths are different, it is considered that the content of the two auxiliary information includes different.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device is different, which may mean that the parameters included in the first configuration information are different.
  • one type of first configuration information includes a first duration
  • another type of first configuration information includes a first number
  • another type of first configuration information includes a first duration and a first number
  • another type of first configuration information Including the first duration and the first period.
  • the first configuration information determined by the core network device is different, which may also mean that the values of the same parameter included in the first configuration information are different.
  • one type of first configuration information includes a first duration
  • another type of first configuration information also includes a first duration, but the values of the two first durations are different
  • one type of first configuration information includes In the first period
  • another type of first configuration information also includes the first period, but the durations of the two first periods are different.
  • the auxiliary information 1 reported by a terminal device includes the type information of the terminal device and the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the type information of the terminal device indicates that the terminal device is a fixed-position electric meter, and the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is, for example, 3 seconds.
  • the auxiliary information 2 reported by another terminal device also includes the type information of the terminal device and the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the type information of the terminal device indicates that the terminal device is a fixed-position camera, and the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is, for example, 2 seconds.
  • the core network device determines the first configuration information 1 according to the auxiliary information 1, and determines the first configuration information 2 according to the auxiliary information 2.
  • the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 may be the same, for example, the first configuration information 1 includes the first duration 1.
  • the first configuration information 2 includes a first duration 2, and both the first duration 1 and the first duration 2 are equal to 3 seconds.
  • the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 may also be different.
  • the first configuration information 1 includes the first duration 1
  • the first configuration information 2 includes the first duration 2 includes the first duration 2
  • the first duration 1 is 3 seconds. Duration 2 is 2 seconds.
  • the core network device sends the first message, and the terminal device receives the first message from the core network device.
  • the first message may indicate the first configuration information.
  • the core network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the core network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device through a NAS message.
  • the core network device sends a second message, and the access network device receives the second message from the core network device.
  • the second message may indicate the first configuration information.
  • the core network device may also send the first configuration information to the access network device.
  • S305 is an optional step and does not have to be performed, so it is represented by a dotted line in FIG. 3.
  • S304 can be executed before S305, or S304 can be executed after S305, or S304 and S305 can be executed at the same time.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • S306 is an optional step and does not have to be performed, so it is represented by a dotted line in FIG. 3.
  • the third configuration information is determined according to the configuration information received by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device only receives the first configuration information, so the third configuration information can be determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, or in other words, the third configuration information is Is the first configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes the first duration, then the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging transmission window of the first duration.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first number, then the terminal device only needs to monitor the first number of POs in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can be determined by the terminal device itself, or by the network device Instructions, or through agreements, etc.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first serial number information, the terminal device only needs to monitor the PO indicated by the first serial number information in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can monitor the PO according to the first period in a paging transmission window.
  • both the core network device that sends paging messages and the terminal device that monitors paging messages can clarify the third configuration information, so that the core network device can send the paging message according to the third configuration information, and the terminal device It can also monitor paging messages according to the third configuration information, so that core network devices do not need to send redundant paging messages, which saves signaling overhead, and terminal devices do not need to monitor paging messages in more POs, which helps save terminals The power consumption of the device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method. Please refer to FIG. 4, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in an RRC inactive state, and the paging described below can be regarded as a paging initiated by an access network device.
  • the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. This is because the embodiment of this application is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example. Therefore, the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2, and the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device described in the following may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device determines auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information can be used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the core network device, and the core network device receives the auxiliary information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may include the auxiliary information in the NAS message and send it to the core network device.
  • the NAS message is, for example, a registration request message, or may also be another NAS message, for example, it may be a NAS message after registration is completed.
  • the core network device sends the auxiliary information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the auxiliary information from the core network device.
  • the access network device can initiate paging. Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, the access network device can determine the corresponding paging configuration for the terminal device.
  • the auxiliary information can be used for the access network device to determine the paging configuration, so the core network device can send the auxiliary information to the access network device.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the auxiliary information from the terminal device.
  • S402 to S403 and S404 are parallel steps, and only one of them needs to be executed, that is, either S402 and S403 or S404 are executed, and both of them need not be executed. Therefore, S402 to S404 are all regarded as optional steps, which are represented by dashed lines in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device can send the auxiliary information to the core network device, and the core network device forwards it to the access network device, or the terminal device can also directly send the auxiliary information to the access network device without the need for the core network device to transfer. Help save signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device can send auxiliary information to the access network device during the random access process.
  • the third message (Msg3) of the 4-step random access channel (4-step random access channel, 4-step RACH) will assist The information is sent to the access network device, or the auxiliary information is sent to the access network device through a 2-step RACH (2-step RACH) message B (MsgB).
  • the terminal device may also send the auxiliary information to the access network device after the random access is successful, for example, it may send the auxiliary information to the access network device through an RRC message (such as a terminal device assistance information message (UE Assistance Information message)) .
  • RRC message such as a terminal device assistance information message (UE Assistance Information message)
  • the access network device determines first configuration information according to the auxiliary information, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor the paging message.
  • the first configuration information described in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as second configuration information.
  • the access network device determines the first configuration information
  • the access network device sends the first message, and the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may indicate the first configuration information.
  • the access network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the access network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device through an RRC message.
  • the RRC message is, for example, an RRC release message used to release the terminal device to an RRC inactive state, or may also be other RRC messages.
  • S407 The terminal device monitors the paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • S407 is an optional step, which is not required to be performed, and is represented by a dotted line in FIG. 4.
  • the third configuration information is determined according to the configuration information received by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device only receives the first configuration information, so the third configuration information can be determined according to the first configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, or in other words, the third configuration information is Is the first configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes the first duration, then the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging transmission window of the first duration.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first number, then the terminal device only needs to monitor the first number of POs in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can be determined by the terminal device itself, or by the network device Instructions, or through agreements, etc.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first serial number information, the terminal device only needs to monitor the PO indicated by the first serial number information in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can monitor the PO according to the first period in a paging transmission window.
  • both the access network device that sends the paging message and the terminal device that monitors the paging message can clarify the third configuration information, so that the access network device can send the paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • the terminal device can also monitor the paging message according to the third configuration information, so that the access network device does not need to send redundant paging messages, saving signaling overhead, and the terminal device does not need to monitor paging messages in more POs, which is helpful In order to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication method. Please refer to FIG. 5, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in an RRC inactive state or an RRC idle state, and the paging described below may be considered as a paging initiated by a core network device or a paging initiated by an access network device.
  • the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. This is because the embodiment of this application is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example. Therefore, the access network device described below may be the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2, and the core network device described below may be the core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device described in the following may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device determines auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information can be used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the auxiliary information to the core network device, and the core network device receives the auxiliary information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may include the auxiliary information in the NAS message and send it to the core network device.
  • the NAS message is, for example, a registration request message, or may also be another NAS message, for example, it may be a NAS message after registration is completed.
  • the core network device sends the auxiliary information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the auxiliary information from the core network device.
  • the core network device determines configuration information according to the auxiliary information, where the configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor the paging message.
  • This configuration information is called first configuration information, or called second configuration information, for example.
  • S505 The core network device sends configuration information, and the terminal device receives the configuration information from the core network device.
  • the core network device determines the configuration information, and can send the configuration information to the terminal device. For example, the core network device can send the configuration information to the terminal device through a NAS message.
  • the access network device determines configuration information according to the auxiliary information, and the configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor the paging message.
  • the configuration information determined by the core network device in S504 is called the first configuration information
  • the configuration information determined by the access network device in S506 may be called the second configuration information; or if the configuration information determined by the core network device in S504 It is called the second configuration information, and the configuration information determined by the access network device in S506 may be called the first configuration information.
  • the configuration information determined by the core network device in S504 is referred to as configuration information 1
  • the configuration information determined by the access network device in S506 is referred to as configuration information 2. That is, the configuration information 1 is the first configuration information, and the configuration information 2 is the second configuration information; or, the configuration information 1 is the second configuration information, and the configuration information 2 is the first configuration information.
  • the access network device sends configuration information 2, and the terminal device receives configuration information 2 from the access network device.
  • the core network device sends configuration information 1 to the access network device, and the access network device receives configuration information 1 from the core network device.
  • S508 may not be executed.
  • the access network device sends the configuration information 2 to the core network device, and the core network device receives the configuration information 2 from the access network device.
  • Both S508 and S509 are optional steps, which are represented by dashed lines in FIG. 5.
  • S510 The terminal device monitors the paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • S510 is also an optional step, which is represented by a dotted line in FIG. 5.
  • the third configuration information is determined according to the configuration information received by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first configuration information and the second configuration information, so the third configuration information may be determined according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information; or the third configuration information is the same as the second configuration information; or the third configuration information is different from the first configuration information and the second configuration information, but the third configuration information is different from the first configuration information.
  • the configuration information is related to the second configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes one or more of the first duration, the first number, the first sequence number information, or the first period.
  • the second configuration information includes one or more of the second duration, the second quantity, the second sequence number information, or the second period.
  • the second duration please refer to the example shown in FIG. 3 for the first
  • the explanation of the duration please refer to the explanation of the first quantity in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3
  • the explanation of the second serial number information please refer to the explanation of the first quantity in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the sequence number information for the explanation of the second cycle, please refer to the explanation of the first cycle in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3.
  • the first configuration information includes the first duration and the second configuration information includes the second duration
  • the first duration may be equal to the second duration, or the first duration and the second duration may not be equal
  • the first configuration information includes the first number
  • the second configuration information includes the second number, the first number may be equal to the second number, or the first number and the second number may not be equal
  • the first configuration information includes the first sequence number information
  • the second configuration information includes the second sequence Number information, the sequence number indicated by the first sequence number information and the sequence number indicated by the second sequence number information may be the same or different
  • the first configuration information includes the first period
  • the second configuration information includes the second period
  • the duration of the first cycle may be equal to the duration of the second cycle, or the duration of the first cycle and the duration of the second cycle may not be equal.
  • the third configuration information may include one or more of the third duration, the third quantity, the third sequence number information, or the third period.
  • the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window, and the third quantity is a paging transmission.
  • the third sequence number information is the sequence number (or called index or code, etc.) of the PO that needs to be monitored in a paging transmission window.
  • the third cycle is to monitor the PO in a paging transmission window.
  • the duration of the third period may be an integer multiple of the interval between two adjacent POs in the paging transmission window.
  • the third configuration information includes the third duration
  • the first configuration information includes the first duration
  • the second configuration information includes the second duration
  • the third duration is, for example, the smaller or larger of the first duration and the second duration Value, or, the third duration is, for example, the arithmetic average or weighted average of the first duration and the second duration
  • the third configuration information includes the third number
  • the first configuration information includes the first number
  • the second configuration information includes The second quantity
  • the third quantity is, for example, the smaller value or the larger value of the first quantity and the second quantity
  • the third quantity is, for example, the arithmetic average or weighted average of the first quantity and the second quantity
  • the third configuration information includes the third serial number information
  • the first configuration information includes the first serial number information
  • the second configuration information includes the second serial number information
  • the third serial number information is, for example, the first serial number information and the first serial number information.
  • the smaller or larger value in the serial number information (for example, the first serial number information indicates 5 serial numbers, the second serial number information indicates 4 serial numbers, and the third serial number information may indicate 4 serial numbers, That is, the third serial number information is the same as the second serial number information, or the third serial number information can indicate 5 serial numbers, that is, the third serial number information is the same as the first serial number information); if the third configuration information Including the third period, and the first configuration information includes the first period, and the second configuration information includes the second period. Then the duration of the third period is, for example, the smaller or the longer of the duration of the first period and the duration of the second period.
  • a large value, or, the duration of the third cycle is, for example, an arithmetic average or a weighted average of the duration of the first cycle and the duration of the second cycle.
  • the terminal device monitoring can be improved as much as possible
  • the success rate of paging messages reduces the probability of missed detection by terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment can be saved Power consumption.
  • the core network device may also determine the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and the core network device and the terminal device determine the third configuration information.
  • the method of information is the same. For example, the larger value of the first configuration information and the second configuration information is selected as the third configuration information, so that the third configuration information determined by the core network device and the terminal device can be the same, ensuring that the second configuration information is the same. Consistency of the behavior of the author. For example, this method is set by the core network device and notified to the terminal device, or stipulated by agreement.
  • the access network device can also determine the third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and the access network device and the terminal device determine the first configuration information.
  • the manner of the three configuration information is also the same, so that the third configuration information determined by the access network device and the terminal device is the same.
  • the third configuration information is the same as the first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes the first duration, then the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging transmission window of the first duration.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first number, then the terminal device only needs to monitor the first number of POs in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can be determined by the terminal device itself, or by the network device Instructions, or through agreements, etc.
  • the terminal device if the first configuration information includes the first serial number information, the terminal device only needs to monitor the PO indicated by the first serial number information in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can monitor the PO according to the first period in a paging transmission window.
  • both the network device (such as the core network device or the access network device) that sends the paging message and the terminal device that monitors the paging message can clarify the third configuration information, so that the network device can follow the third configuration information.
  • the configuration information sends a paging message
  • the terminal device can also monitor the paging message according to the third configuration information, so that the network device does not need to send redundant paging messages, saving signaling overhead, and the terminal device does not need to monitor the paging in more POs. Calling messages helps to save the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device can determine the final configuration information according to a variety of configuration information (for example, the first configuration information and the second configuration information), which can make the determined configuration information more accurate and more in line with the requirements of multiple network elements.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a fourth communication method. Please refer to FIG. 6, which is a flowchart of this method.
  • the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 is taken as an example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, in an RRC inactive state or an RRC idle state, and the paging described below may be considered as a paging initiated by a core network device or a paging initiated by an access network device.
  • the method executed by the network device and the terminal device is taken as an example. This is because the embodiment of this application is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example. Therefore, the network device described below may be an access network device or a core network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2, and the terminal device described below may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2.
  • the terminal device sends request information to the network device, and the network device receives the request information from the terminal device.
  • the request information can be used to request relaxation monitoring of paging messages.
  • the terminal device may send request information to the network device through a NAS message.
  • the NAS message is, for example, a registration request message, or may also be other NAS messages.
  • the terminal device can send request information to the network device through an RRC message or other messages.
  • an RRC message is a message for the terminal device to send auxiliary information to the network device, such as a UE auxiliary information message.
  • the auxiliary information described in the embodiments of the present application includes, for example, the desired configuration of the terminal device, or includes the service information of the terminal device, or includes the desired configuration of the terminal device and the service information of the terminal device, and so on.
  • the service information of the terminal device includes the parameters of the service being performed by the terminal device, such as the type of service being performed by the terminal device or the bandwidth required by the service.
  • the configuration expected by the terminal device is, for example, the air interface configuration expected by the terminal device, such as the time slot format expected by the terminal device.
  • S601 is an optional step, which is represented by a dotted line in FIG. 6.
  • the network device sends instruction information, and the terminal device receives the instruction information from the network device.
  • the indication information may indicate that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed.
  • the core network device can send instruction information to the terminal device through a NAS message. If the terminal device sends the request information to the network device through the registration request message, the NAS message used by the core network device to send the indication information is, for example, a registration acceptance message.
  • the registration acceptance message can also be used to configure eDRX related parameters for the terminal device, such as Configure eDRX period, etc.
  • the access network device can send indication information to the terminal device through an RRC message or other messages.
  • an RRC message is used to release the terminal device to the RRC inactive state or the RRC idle state. State RRC release message.
  • the access network device may also send the instruction information through a broadcast message.
  • a broadcast message is, for example, a system message, or may also be other messages.
  • the indication information may indicate in an explicit manner that the relaxed monitoring of the paging message is allowed, or indicates that the relaxed monitoring of the paging message is not allowed.
  • the indication information occupies one or more bits, and the one or more bits may indicate that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed, or that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed.
  • the indication information occupies 1 bit as an example, if the value of this 1 bit is "1", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is allowed, and if the value of this 1 bit is "0", it indicates that loose monitoring is not allowed Paging message; or, if the value of this 1 bit is "0", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is allowed, and if the value of this 1 bit is "1", it indicates that loose monitoring of paging messages is not allowed.
  • the network device may also send configuration information, and the terminal device may receive configuration information from the network device, and the configuration information may be configured by the network device.
  • the network device may send the instruction information and the configuration information through one message, or may also send the instruction information and the configuration information through different messages, respectively. If the instruction information and configuration information are sent separately through different messages, the network device may send the instruction information first and then the configuration information, or it may send the configuration information first and then the instruction information, or it may also send the instruction information and the configuration information at the same time.
  • the indication information indicates that the paging message is allowed to be relaxed
  • the network device may send configuration information
  • the indication information indicates that the paging message is not allowed to be relaxed, the network device may not need to send the configuration information.
  • the configuration information may include one or more of the following: information about M types of relaxation conditions, information about N types of relaxation configurations, or the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations.
  • the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions; or, the configuration information includes information about N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes M Information about three types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions, and the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes N types of relaxation configurations Information, and the corresponding relationship between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations; or, the configuration information includes information about M types of relaxation conditions, information about N types of relaxation configurations, and the relationship between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations Correspondence between.
  • one of the M types of relaxation conditions can correspond to one or more of the N types of relaxation configurations, and each of the N types of relaxation configurations can correspond to one of the M types of relaxation conditions. . Therefore, M is greater than or equal to N, where both M and N are integers greater than or equal to 1.
  • the relaxed condition refers to the condition that can be relaxed to monitor the paging message
  • the relaxed configuration refers to the configuration of the terminal device to monitor the paging message. It is called "relaxed configuration" because the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the relaxed configuration is less than the number of times it monitors paging messages in the normal configuration.
  • the required power is less than the power required by the terminal device to monitor paging messages in the normal configuration. Therefore, compared to the mechanism that the terminal device normally monitors paging messages, it is important for the terminal device to monitor paging messages in a relaxed configuration. It is a kind of "relaxation", so it is called a relaxed configuration.
  • the configuration information can include the relaxation condition and N kinds of relaxation configurations, and there is no need to include the corresponding relationship between the relaxation conditions and the N kinds of relaxation configurations, because the relaxation conditions are naturally related to Corresponding to N kinds of relaxed configurations.
  • the configuration information may include M types of relaxation conditions, N types of relaxation configurations, and the correspondence between M types of relaxation conditions and N types of relaxation configurations, so that The terminal device clarifies which kind of relaxation condition corresponds to which kind of relaxation configuration.
  • one or more of the M types of relaxation conditions, N types of relaxation configurations, or the correspondence between relaxation conditions and relaxation configurations may also be pre-configured in the network device And terminal equipment, or can also be stipulated by agreement, etc., then the network equipment does not need to send configuration information to the terminal equipment, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the indication information may indicate in an implicit indication manner that it is allowed to relax listening to the paging message.
  • the indication information is the configuration information described.
  • the configuration information may be referred to as configuration information or indication information, and the configuration information may implicitly indicate that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages.
  • the network device implicitly indicates that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages by sending configuration information. In this way, the terminal device is able to know the correspondence between the relaxation condition and the relaxation configuration without sending additional information as indication information, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • S603 The terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, and the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxation of monitoring the paging message. For example, M types of relaxation conditions are introduced in S602, and the first relaxation conditions may include one or more of the M types of relaxation conditions. If the first relaxation condition includes a relaxation condition, S603 is the terminal device determining that the relaxation condition is satisfied. Or, if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, S603 may be that the terminal device determines that all of the multiple relaxation conditions are satisfied, that is, each relaxation condition in the multiple relaxation conditions is satisfied.
  • the terminal device considers that the first relaxation condition is satisfied; or, if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, then S603 may be that the terminal device determines to meet some of the multiple relaxation conditions, that is, in When some of the multiple relaxation conditions are satisfied, the terminal device also considers that the first relaxation condition is satisfied. For example, if the number of satisfied relaxation conditions is greater than or equal to 50% of the number of multiple relaxation conditions, the terminal device considers that the first relaxation condition is satisfied.
  • S603 may be performed, and if the terminal device determines that the indication information indicates that the paging message is not allowed to relax, it is not necessary to perform S603.
  • the first relaxation condition includes, for example, one or more of the following: the change value of the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the first time period is less than the first threshold, and the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the second time period It is greater than the second threshold, or the location of the terminal device is fixed.
  • the first relaxation condition is a relaxation condition
  • the relaxation condition may include one or more of the above; or, if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, any of the multiple relaxation conditions One type may include one or more of the above, and the content included in different relaxation conditions among the multiple relaxation conditions may be the same or different.
  • the first relaxation condition includes a change in a measurement value obtained by measuring a reference signal during a first time period that is less than a first threshold; or, the first relaxation condition includes a measurement value obtained by measuring a reference signal during a second time period. Greater than the second threshold; or, the first relaxation condition includes that the location of the terminal device is fixed; or, the first relaxation condition includes that the change in the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the first time period is less than the first threshold, and It includes that the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the second time period is greater than the second threshold; or, the first relaxation condition includes that the change value of the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal during the first time period is less than the first threshold, and The location of the terminal device is fixed, and so on.
  • the first relaxation condition may also include other conditions, which are not specifically limited, as long as the first relaxation condition can indicate that the state of the terminal device is relatively stable, or that the channel condition of the terminal device is better.
  • the first duration may be equal to the second duration, or not equal to the second duration.
  • the reference signal is, for example, a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) or a synchronization signal and a physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signaland physical broadcast channel block, SSB), etc.
  • the measurement value is, for example, reference signal receiving power (RSRP), reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), or signal-to-noise ratio (SNR).
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • RSRQ reference signal receiving quality
  • SNR signal-to-noise ratio
  • the first relaxation condition includes that the change value of the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the first time period is smaller than the first threshold, and the measurement value is RSRP. Then the terminal device can normally measure the reference signal within the first time period. For example, the terminal device can calculate the difference between the RSRP obtained in every two adjacent measurement processes, or the terminal device can also calculate the current two after a period of time. For the RSRP difference obtained in the next adjacent measurement process, the terminal device can obtain one or more difference values for the RSRP obtained in the first time period. If the one or more differences are less than the first threshold, the terminal device can determine that the change in the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the first time period is less than the first threshold.
  • the terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, or if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions and the first duration condition corresponds to the first sub-relaxation condition included in the first relaxation condition, the terminal device determines Meet the first sub-relaxation condition; or, if more than 50% of the multiple differences are less than the first threshold, the terminal device can determine the change in the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the first time period The value is less than the first threshold.
  • the terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, or if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, the first duration condition corresponds to the first relaxation condition. If a relaxation condition includes the first sub-relaxation condition, the terminal device determines that the first sub-relaxation condition is satisfied.
  • the first relaxation condition includes that the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the second time period is greater than the second threshold, and the measurement value is RSRQ.
  • the terminal device can normally measure the reference signal during the second time period, and can obtain one or more RSRQs. If the one or more RSRQs are all greater than the second threshold, the terminal device can determine that the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the second time period is greater than the second threshold.
  • the first relaxation condition includes a relaxation condition . The terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, or, if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions and the first duration condition corresponds to the second relaxation condition included in the second relaxation condition, the terminal device determines that the second relaxation condition is satisfied.
  • the terminal device can determine that the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal within the second time period is greater than the second threshold, this If the first relaxation condition includes one relaxation condition, the terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, or if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions, the first duration condition corresponds to the second relaxation condition included in the second relaxation condition.
  • the terminal device determines that the second sub-relaxation condition is satisfied; or, if the average value (arithmetic average or weighted average) of the one or more RSRQs is greater than the second threshold, the terminal device can determine that the second time period The measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal in the internal is greater than the second threshold.
  • the terminal device determines that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, or if the first relaxation condition includes multiple relaxation conditions Condition, the first duration condition corresponds to the second sub-relaxation condition included in the second relaxation condition, and the terminal device determines that the second sub-relaxation condition is satisfied.
  • the second sub-relaxation condition and the first sub-relaxation condition may be the same type of relaxation condition, or may be different relaxation conditions.
  • the first relaxation condition can indicate that the state of the terminal device is relatively stable, or that the channel condition of the terminal device is better. For such a terminal device, it may only need to monitor the paging message a few times to receive the paging message correctly. Therefore, there is no need to monitor paging messages too many times. Then the terminal device that meets the first relaxation condition can perform relaxation monitoring of the paging message to save power consumption.
  • the terminal device monitors the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition.
  • the number of times that the terminal device monitors paging messages in the relaxed configuration corresponding to the first relaxed condition is less than the number of times that the terminal device monitors paging messages in the normal configuration.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide M types of relaxation conditions, and the relaxation configurations corresponding to different relaxation conditions may be the same or different.
  • the K types of relaxation conditions include relaxation condition 1, and also relaxation condition 2.
  • Relaxation condition 1 corresponds to relaxation configuration 1
  • relaxation condition 2 corresponds to relaxation configuration 2.
  • Relaxation configuration 1 and relaxation configuration 2 can be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can periodically or non-periodically determine whether one or more of the K types of relaxation conditions are met. If one of the K types of relaxation conditions is met, the terminal device can monitor and search according to the relaxation configuration corresponding to the relaxation conditions. Or, if multiple types of K relaxation conditions are met at the same time, the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the relaxation configuration corresponding to one of the multiple relaxation conditions.
  • the K types of relaxation conditions include partial relaxation conditions or all of the M types of relaxation conditions, and K is an integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to M.
  • the terminal device satisfies the first relaxation condition and listens to the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition as an example.
  • the first relaxation condition includes, for example, one or more of K kinds of relaxation conditions.
  • the first relaxation condition belongs to K kinds of relaxation conditions, and naturally also belongs to the M kinds of relaxation conditions, and the first relaxation configuration belongs to the N kinds of relaxation configurations. That is to say, the corresponding relationship between the first relaxed condition and the first relaxed configuration is that the network device has sent to the terminal device, or is pre-configured in the terminal device, or is stipulated by the agreement, if the terminal device determines that the terminal When the device satisfies the first relaxation condition, the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition can be determined.
  • the first relaxation configuration is the relaxation configuration corresponding to the relaxation condition; or, as described above, one relaxation condition can correspond to one relaxation configuration Or multiple relaxation configurations, if the first relaxation condition corresponds to multiple relaxation configurations, the terminal device can determine one of these multiple relaxation configurations, for example, the terminal device determines the first relaxation configuration.
  • the first relaxation configuration is the relaxation configuration corresponding to the multiple relaxation conditions; or, if these multiple relaxation conditions
  • the relaxation configurations corresponding to the relaxation conditions are all different, or at least two of the multiple relaxation conditions have different relaxation configurations corresponding to the relaxation conditions
  • the first relaxation configuration may be one of the relaxation configurations corresponding to the multiple relaxation conditions. For example, if the relaxation configurations corresponding to these multiple relaxation conditions are different, or at least two of these relaxation conditions correspond to different relaxation configurations, the terminal device can select any one of the relaxation conditions corresponding to the relaxation conditions.
  • the relaxed configuration as the first relaxed configuration.
  • the first relaxation configuration includes, for example, one or more of the third duration, the first number, the first sequence number information, or the first period.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes the third duration; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the first number; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the first sequence number information; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the first period; or, the first The relaxed configuration includes the third duration and the first number; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the third duration and the first period; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the first number and the first period; or, the first relaxed configuration includes the third Duration, first quantity, first period, etc.
  • the third duration is the duration of a paging transmission window
  • the first quantity is the number of POs that the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the first serial number information refers to what the terminal device needs to monitor in a paging transmission window
  • the sequence number of the PO (or referred to as an index or number, etc.).
  • the first period is the period in which the terminal device monitors the PO in a paging transmission window.
  • the duration of the first period may be an integer multiple of the interval between two adjacent POs in the paging transmission window.
  • the first relaxed configuration determined by the core network device may also include other information, which is not specifically limited.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a third duration, the third duration may be less than the fourth duration, and the fourth duration is the duration of a PTW in a normal configuration; for another example, the first relaxed configuration includes a first number, and the first number may be less than The second number, the second number is the number of POs included in a PTW under the normal configuration, or the number of POs that the terminal device needs to monitor in a PTW under the normal configuration, for example, the first number of POs can be the normal configuration
  • the time interval between (for example, called the first time interval) is greater than the time interval between every two adjacent POs in the time domain (for example, called the second time interval) in the second number of POs; for another example ,
  • the first relaxed configuration includes the first sequence number information, and the sequence number
  • the serial number of part of the PO in any embodiment of the present application may include the serial number of the first half of the PO in a PTW, but not the serial number of the second half of the PO in a PTW; or include the serial number of the second half of the PO in a PTW;
  • the sequence numbers of the first and last POs do not include the sequence numbers of other POs in a PTW. It should be emphasized that the PO sequence numbers included here are indicated to the UE by the network, but which PO sequence numbers are not indicated to the UE. Do restrictions.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes the third duration, the first number, the first sequence number information or the first period, its effect can reduce the number of times the terminal device monitors the PO. Therefore, it can be considered that the terminal device monitors the search in the first relaxed configuration.
  • the number of paging messages is less than the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages under normal configuration.
  • the network device When the network device sends the paging message, it can send it according to the first relaxed configuration, or the network device can also send it in a normal way. Or, since the terminal device performs relaxation monitoring by itself when it determines that the relaxation condition is satisfied, and the network device does not know whether the terminal device meets the corresponding relaxation condition, it does not know whether the terminal device performs relaxation monitoring. Then a better way is that the network device sends a paging message at each PO.
  • the network device can send a paging message for the terminal device in each PO within a paging transmission window, so as to improve the terminal device's successful reception of the paging message Rate.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes the third duration
  • the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the paging transmission window of the third duration.
  • the terminal device only needs to monitor the first number of POs in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can be determined by the terminal device itself, or by the network device. Instructions, or through agreements, etc.
  • the terminal device if the first relaxed configuration includes the first serial number information, the terminal device only needs to monitor the PO indicated by the first serial number information in a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device can monitor the PO according to the first period within a paging transmission window.
  • the terminal device determines that the K relaxation conditions are not satisfied.
  • the non-satisfying K relaxation conditions mentioned here means that none of the K relaxation conditions are met, or in other words, any one of the K relaxation conditions is not met.
  • the K relaxation conditions include partial relaxation conditions or all relaxation conditions in the M relaxation conditions.
  • S606 The terminal device monitors the paging message according to the normal configuration.
  • S605 and S606 are optional steps, which are not required to be performed, and are represented by dashed lines in FIG. 6.
  • the terminal device may periodically or aperiodically determine whether the K types of relaxation conditions are satisfied. For example, after determining that the first relaxation condition is satisfied, the terminal device monitors the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition. After that, the terminal device determines that the second relaxation condition among the K types of relaxation conditions is satisfied, and the terminal device can change to monitor the paging message according to the second relaxation configuration corresponding to the second relaxation condition. Or, after the terminal device determines that the K relaxation conditions are not satisfied, that is, if each of the K relaxation conditions is not met, the terminal device can resume normal monitoring of paging messages, that is, the terminal device can be configured as normal Monitor paging messages to reduce the probability of missed paging messages.
  • the terminal device can monitor the paging message according to the first relaxation configuration.
  • the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the first relaxed configuration is less than the number of times the terminal device monitors paging messages in the normal configuration. Since the number of times to monitor paging messages is reduced, the power consumption of the terminal device can be reduced.
  • whether the relaxation condition is satisfied can be determined by the terminal device itself, without instructions from the network device, making the determination method more flexible.
  • the terminal device when the user does not use a terminal device (such as a smart phone, a smart watch, or a smart bracelet), the terminal device still reduces a lot of power after a period of time. This is because even if the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and there is no data transmission, the terminal device needs to wake up to monitor the PO, and many monitoring is useless, which will cause the terminal device to consume excess power and power. The reduction is faster, and the endurance becomes worse.
  • FIG. 7A which is the remaining power of the terminal device used by the user at the first moment, for example, 90%.
  • the remaining power of the terminal device becomes 72%, for example, refer to FIG. 7B.
  • the first moment is the start moment of the duration A
  • the second moment is the end moment of the duration A.
  • the user does not use the terminal device within the time period A, then at the second moment, the remaining power of the terminal device is, for example, 88%.
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can save the power of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 800 is a terminal device 800, for example.
  • the terminal device 800 includes a processing module 810 and a transceiver module 820.
  • the terminal device 800 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied to the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be a transceiver.
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit.
  • the processing module 810 may include a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more Central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU).
  • the transceiver module 820 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 810 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 810 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 810 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 820 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S301, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S302, S304, and S306, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S401, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S402, S404, S406, and S407, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S502, S505, S507, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be a functional module that can perform both sending operations and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 820 may be used to perform steps from the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any embodiment.
  • the transceiver module 820 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 820 can be considered as a receiving module.
  • the transceiver module 820 can also be two functional modules, the transceiver module 820 can be regarded as a collective term for these two functional modules, the two functional modules are respectively a sending module and a receiving module, the sending module is used to complete the sending operation, for example
  • the sending module can be used to perform all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and the receiving module is used to complete receiving Operations, for example, the receiving module may be used to perform all receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 3 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5.
  • the processing module 810 is configured to determine auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information is used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device;
  • the transceiver module 820 is configured to send the auxiliary information.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 820 is further configured to receive first configuration information and/or second configuration information
  • the processing module 810 is further configured to monitor the paging message according to the third configuration information, where the third configuration information is determined according to the received configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first quantity
  • the second configuration information includes a second duration and/or a second quantity.
  • the second duration is the duration of the paging transmission window
  • the first quantity and the second quantity are both the number of paging occasions that need to be monitored in one paging transmission window.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 900 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 900 is a network device 900, for example.
  • the network device 900 includes a processing module 910 and a transceiver module 920.
  • the network device 900 may be a network device, or may be a chip applied to the network device or other combination devices or components having the functions of the above-mentioned network device.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 910 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPU.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 910 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 910 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 910 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 920 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 910 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S303, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiving module 920 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S302, S304, and S305, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 910 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S61 to S67, and/or to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 920 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S402 to S404, and S406, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 910 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S61 to S67, and/or to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 920 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S502, S503, S505, and S507 to S509, and/or other technologies used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • transceiver module 920 for the implementation of the transceiver module 920, reference may be made to the introduction of the implementation of the transceiver module 820.
  • the transceiver module 920 is configured to receive auxiliary information, and the auxiliary information is used to determine paging parameters configured for the terminal device;
  • the processing module 910 is configured to determine first configuration information according to the auxiliary information, where the first configuration information is used by the terminal device to monitor paging messages;
  • the transceiver module 920 is also used to send the first configuration information.
  • the transceiver module 920 is also used to:
  • Receiving second configuration information determining third configuration information according to the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and sending a paging message according to the third configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes a first duration and/or a first quantity
  • the second configuration information includes a second duration and/or a second quantity.
  • the second duration is the duration of the paging transmission window
  • the first quantity and the second quantity are both the number of paging occasions that need to be monitored in one paging transmission window.
  • the third configuration information includes a third duration, the third duration being the larger or smaller value of the first duration and the second duration, and the third duration is the duration of the paging transmission window ;and / or,
  • the third configuration information includes a third quantity, the third quantity is a larger value or a smaller value of the first quantity and the second quantity, and the third quantity is in a paging transmission window. The number of paging occasions that need to be monitored internally.
  • the auxiliary information includes one or more of the following:
  • the type information of the terminal device is the type information of the terminal device.
  • the mobile state information of the terminal device
  • the length of the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device or,
  • the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device is the number of paging occasions in the paging transmission window expected by the terminal device.
  • the network device is a core network device
  • the transceiver module 920 is further configured to send the auxiliary information and the first configuration information to the access network device serving the terminal device .
  • the network device is an access network device
  • the transceiver module 920 is further configured to send the first relaxed configuration to a core network device serving the terminal device.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1000 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication apparatus 1000 is a terminal device 1000, for example.
  • the terminal device 1000 includes a processing module 1010 and a transceiver module 1020.
  • the terminal device 1000 may be a terminal device, or a chip applied in the terminal device, or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 1010 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPU.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1010 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 1010 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1010 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 1020 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 1010 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operations, such as S603 and S605, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • the transceiver module 1020 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S601, S602, S604, and S606, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • transceiver module 1020 for the implementation of the transceiver module 1020, reference may be made to the introduction of the implementation of the transceiver module 820.
  • the processing module 1010 is configured to determine that a first relaxation condition is satisfied, and the first relaxation condition is a relaxation condition for monitoring paging messages;
  • the transceiver module 1020 is configured to monitor paging messages according to the first relaxed configuration corresponding to the first relaxed condition.
  • the number of times that the terminal device monitors the paging message in the relaxed configuration corresponding to the first relaxed condition is less than that in the normal configuration The number of paging messages.
  • the first relaxation condition includes one or more of the following:
  • the change value of the measurement value obtained by measuring the reference signal is less than the first threshold
  • the measured value obtained by measuring the reference signal is greater than the second threshold
  • the location of the terminal device is fixed.
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a third duration
  • the normal configuration includes a fourth duration
  • the third duration is less than the fourth duration
  • the third duration and the fourth duration are both of the paging transmission window Duration;
  • the first relaxed configuration includes a first number
  • the normal configuration includes a second number
  • the first number is less than the second number
  • both the first number and the second number are transmitted in one page The number of paging occasions to be monitored in the window.
  • the first number of paging occasions are the first N paging occasions in a time domain sequence within a paging transmission window, and N is the first number; and/or,
  • the first time interval is greater than the second time interval
  • the first time interval is the time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the first number of paging occasions
  • the second time interval is The time interval between every two adjacent paging occasions in the second number of paging occasions.
  • the transceiver module 1020 is further configured to receive indication information, where the indication information is used to indicate that it is allowed to relax listening to the paging message.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the transceiver module 1020 is further configured to receive configuration information, where the configuration information is used to configure the first relaxation condition and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the indication information is used to configure the first relaxation condition and/or the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition.
  • the configuration information further includes a correspondence between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the transceiver module 1020 is further configured to send request information, where the request information is used to request relaxation of monitoring paging messages.
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • the processing module 1010 is also used to determine that K types of relaxation conditions are not satisfied, where the K types of relaxation conditions are all relaxation conditions or partial relaxation conditions, and the first relaxation condition is one of the K types of relaxation conditions, where K is An integer greater than or equal to 1;
  • the transceiver module 1020 is also configured to monitor paging messages according to the normal configuration.
  • the first relaxation condition is one of K relaxation conditions
  • the K relaxation conditions further include a second relaxation condition
  • the second relaxation condition corresponds to the second relaxation configuration
  • the first relaxed configuration is different from the second relaxed configuration
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to 1.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1100 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 1100 is, for example, a network device 1100.
  • the network device 1100 includes a processing module 1110 and a transceiver module 1120.
  • the network device 1100 may be a network device, or may be a chip applied in the network device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the functions of the network device described above.
  • the transceiver module 1120 may be a transceiver
  • the transceiver may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit, etc.
  • the processing module 1110 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPU.
  • the transceiver module 1120 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1110 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1120 may be an input/output interface of a chip (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module 1110 may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1110 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component, and the transceiver module 1120 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • the processing module 1110 can be used to perform all operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the transceiving operation, such as determining whether to allow or not allow the terminal device to relax listening to paging messages, and/ Or other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver module 1120 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S601 and S602, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • transceiver module 1120 reference may be made to the introduction of the implementation of the transceiver module 820.
  • the processing module 1110 is used to determine that the terminal device is allowed to relax monitoring the paging message
  • the transceiver module 1120 is configured to send instruction information, where the instruction information is used to indicate that it is allowed to relax monitoring of paging messages.
  • the indication information is carried in a broadcast message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in an RRC message; or,
  • the indication information is carried in the NAS message.
  • the transceiver module 1120 is further configured to send configuration information, where the configuration information is used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure the first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition; or,
  • the instruction information is used to configure a first relaxation condition, and/or configure a first relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition;
  • the first relaxation condition is a condition for relaxing monitoring of paging messages, and the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the relaxation configuration corresponding to the first relaxation condition is less than the number of times that the terminal device listens to paging messages in the normal configuration .
  • the configuration information further includes a correspondence between the first relaxation condition and the first relaxation configuration.
  • the transceiver module 1120 is further configured to receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request relaxation of monitoring paging messages.
  • the request information is carried in a NAS message; or,
  • the request message is carried in the RRC message.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device or a circuit.
  • the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 12 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 12 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 12. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with transceiving functions can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device (the transceiving unit can be a functional unit that can realize the sending and receiving functions; or the transceiving unit can also be It includes two functional units, namely a receiving unit capable of realizing the receiving function and a transmitting unit capable of realizing the transmitting function), and the processor with the processing function is regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 1210 and a processing unit 1220.
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 1210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 1210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 1210 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 1210 is used to perform sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment
  • processing unit 1220 is used to perform other operations on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation.
  • the processing unit 1210 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 except for the transceiving operations, such as S301, and/or used to support Other processes of the described technology.
  • the transceiving unit 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, such as S302, S304, and S306, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1210 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S401, and/or to support the text. Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiving unit 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S402, S404, S406, and S407, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1210 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except for the transceiving operations, such as S501, and/or to support this Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiving unit 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S502, S505, S507, and S510, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 1210 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S603 and S605, and/or for Other processes that support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiving unit 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S601, S602, S604, and S606, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiving unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is an integrated processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit.
  • the device shown in FIG. 13 can be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 810 in FIG. 8.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processing module 1010 in FIG. 10.
  • the device includes a processor 1310, a data sending processor 1320, and a data receiving processor 1330.
  • the processing module 810 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1310 in FIG. 13 and complete corresponding functions; the transceiver module 820 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1320 in FIG. 13 and/or receiving data Processor 1330, and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the processing module 1010 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 1310 in FIG.
  • the transceiver module 1020 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 1320 in FIG. 13, and/or Receive the data processor 1330 and complete the corresponding functions.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 13, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
  • the processing device 1400 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as the modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1403 and an interface 1404.
  • the processor 1403 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 810
  • the interface 1404 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 820.
  • the processor 1403 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 1010
  • the interface 1404 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 1020.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1406, a processor 1403, and a program stored in the memory 1406 and running on the processor.
  • the processor 1403 executes the program on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 1406 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1400, as long as the memory 1406 can be connected to the The processor 1403 is sufficient.
  • the device 1500 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1510 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU) 1520 .
  • RRU 1510 may be referred to as a transceiver module, and the transceiver module may include a transmitting module and a receiving module, or the transceiver module may be a module capable of implementing functions of transmitting and receiving.
  • the transceiver module may correspond to the transceiver module 920 in FIG. 9 or may correspond to the transceiver module 1120 in FIG. 11.
  • the transceiver module may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 1511 and a radio frequency unit 1512.
  • the RRU 1510 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 1520 part of the BBU is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 1510 and the BBU 1520 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 1520 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing module. It may correspond to the processing module 910 in FIG. 9 or may correspond to the processing module 1110 in FIG. 11, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel Encoding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 1520 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 1520 also includes a memory 1521 and a processor 1522.
  • the memory 1521 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 1522 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 1521 and the processor 1522 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system.
  • the first communication system may include the terminal device involved in any one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 3 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 3 to FIG. A network device involved in any one of the illustrated embodiments.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the terminal device 800 in FIG. 8.
  • the network device is, for example, the network device 900 in FIG. 9.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication system.
  • the second communication system may include the terminal device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above, and the network device involved in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 described above.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the terminal device 1000 in FIG. 10.
  • the network device is, for example, the network device 1100 in FIG. 11.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 3 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. The process related to the network device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the network device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the network device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above-mentioned method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the network device in the embodiment is not limited to any one of the embodiments.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to network equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to network equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to network equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to network equipment.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a CPU, or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), ready-made Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component
  • the memory storage module
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • computer-readable media can include random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), and electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory).
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • USB flash disk universal serial bus flash disk
  • mobile hard disk or other optical disk storage
  • disk storage A medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Probability & Statistics with Applications (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及一种通信方法及设备。终端设备确定辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。终端设备发送所述辅助信息。在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以向网络设备发送辅助信息，那么网络设备可以根据辅助信息确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。辅助信息可以指示终端设备的状态等，从而网络设备所配置的寻呼参数能够较为符合终端设备的实际需求。例如对于无需频繁监听寻呼消息的终端设备，网络设备根据辅助信息可以为此类终端设备配置时长较短的寻呼传输窗，从而终端设备监听寻呼消息的次数较少，有助于降低终端设备的功耗，实现终端设备的节能。

Description

一种通信方法及设备
本申请要求在2020年4月2日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202010257781.8的中国专利申请的优先权，发明名称为“一种eDRX下寻呼监听放松的方法、UE及网络设备”的中国专利申请的优先权。本申请要求在2020年5月18日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202010419633.1的中国专利申请的优先权，发明名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权。本申请要求在2020年12月31日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202011636879.0的中国专利申请的优先权，发明名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及设备。
背景技术
第五代(5 generation，5G)新空口(new radio，NR)技术沿用了长期演进技术(long term evolution，LTE)***中的非连续接收(discontinuous reception，DRX)机制。DRX机制包括DRX周期，终端设备在DRX周期内会周期性地“醒来”一段时间，在DRX周期中的其他时间可以保持“休眠”状态，以降低功耗。另外，终端设备在处于无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)空闲(idle)态或RRC非活跃(inactive)态时，若核心网或基站需要向终端设备发送下行数据，会先向终端设备发送寻呼(paging)消息，用于寻呼终端设备，终端设备收到寻呼消息后，会发起RRC连接建立过程从而接收下行数据。对于配置了DRX的终端设备，会在DRX周期内包括的寻呼时机(paging occasion，PO)“醒来”接收寻呼消息。
考虑进一步降低功耗，在DRX的机制上引入了扩展的DRX(extended DRX，eDRX)，将DRX的周期扩展为更大的值，即终端设备可以“休眠”更长的时间再“醒来”一次。在eDRX中引入了寻呼传输窗(paging transmission window，PTW)，一个eDRX周期内包括一个PTW，该PTW包括一个或多个PO。在一个eDRX周期中，终端设备会在PTW中的一个或多个PO“醒来”接收寻呼消息，直到成功接收到包含该终端设备的身份号(ID)的寻呼消息或者该PTW结束为止。
目前，核心网设备会为终端设备配置寻呼参数，例如配置PTW的时长等，终端设备可按照核心网设备配置的寻呼参数监听寻呼消息。但核心网设备为终端设备配置的寻呼参数可能并不符合终端设备的实际需求，例如终端设备本身无需 频繁监听寻呼消息，但核心网设备为终端设备配置的PTW的时长较长，导致终端设备需要多次监听寻呼消息，不利于终端设备的节能。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及设备，用于使得网络为终端设备配置的寻呼参数尽量符合终端设备的实际需求。
第一方面，提供第一种通信方法，该方法包括：确定辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；发送所述辅助信息。
该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以向网络设备发送辅助信息，那么网络设备可以根据辅助信息确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。辅助信息可以指示终端设备的状态等，从而网络设备所配置的寻呼参数能够较为符合终端设备的实际需求。例如对于无需频繁监听寻呼消息的终端设备，网络设备根据辅助信息可以为此类终端设备配置时长较短的寻呼传输窗，从而终端设备监听寻呼消息的次数较少，有助于降低终端设备的功耗，实现终端设备的节能。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
辅助信息例如包括如下的一项或多项：终端设备的类型信息，终端设备的移动状态信息，终端设备所在的位置信息，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，或，终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。例如，辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备的移动状态信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备所在的位置信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息和终端设备所在的位置信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长和终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长和终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期；等等。 其中，终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期的长度，是指终端设备所期望的在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期，该周期的长度可以是寻呼传输窗内的相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。当然，本申请实施例对于辅助信息包括的内容不做限制，例如辅助信息除了包括如上信息外，还可以包括其他信息，或者辅助信息不包括如上任何信息，而是包括其他信息。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收第一配置信息和/或第二配置信息；
根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，所述第三配置信息是根据接收的配置信息确定的。
第三配置信息是根据终端设备接收的配置信息确定的。例如，终端设备只接收了第一配置信息，则第三配置信息可以根据第一配置信息确定，例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，或者说，第三配置信息即为第一配置信息。又例如，终端设备只接收了第二配置信息，则第三配置信息可以根据第二配置信息确定，例如第三配置信息与第二配置信息相同，或者说，第三配置信息即为第二配置信息。再例如，终端设备接收了第一配置信息和第二配置信息，因此第三配置信息可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定。例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同；或者第三配置信息与第二配置信息相同；或者第三配置信息与第一配置信息和第二配置信息均不同，但第三配置信息与第一配置信息和第二配置信息有关。即，终端设备可以根据接收的配置信息来确定第三配置信息，如果终端设备接收了多个配置信息，则可以根据多个配置信息来综合确定第三配置信息。多个配置信息例如来自不同的设备，例如第一配置信息来自核心网设备，第二配置信息来自接入网设备，或者第一配置信息来自接入网设备，第二配置信息来自核心网设备等。不同的配置信息代表了不同的设备对终端设备的配置，终端设备根据这多种配置综合确定第三配置信息，可以使得所确定的第三配置信息更为合理。
结合第一方面的第二种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
第一配置信息例如包括第一时长、第一数量、第一序列号信息或第一周期中的一种或多种。例如，第一配置信息包括第一时长；或者，第一配置信息包括第一数量；或者，第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息；或者，第一配置信息包括第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一数量；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一数量和第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长、第一数量和第一周期，等等。第一时长是一个寻呼传输窗的时长，第一数量是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数，第一序列号信息是指终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的序列号(或者 称为索引或编号等)，第一周期是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。第一周期的时长可以是寻呼传输窗内相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。当然，第一配置信息还可以包括其他的信息，具体的不做限制。
结合第一方面的第三种可选的实施方式，在第一方面的第四种可选的实施方式中，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
如果终端设备接收了第一配置信息和第二配置信息，则终端设备可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息来确定第三配置信息。例如，第三配置信息包括第三时长，且第一配置信息包括第一时长，第二配置信息包括第二时长，那么第三时长例如为第一时长和第二时长中的较小值，以节省终端设备的功耗；或者，第三时长例如为第一时长和第二时长中的较大值，以尽量提高终端设备监听寻呼消息的成功率，减少终端设备漏检的概率。而如果第三配置信息包括第三数量，且第一配置信息包括第一数量，第二配置信息包括第二数量，那么第三数量例如为第一数量和第二数量中的较小值，以节省终端设备的功耗；或者，第三数量例如为第一数量和第二数量中的较大值，以尽量提高终端设备监听寻呼消息的成功率，减少终端设备漏检的概率。
第二方面，提供第二种通信方法，所述方法应用于网络设备，该方法包括：接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；根据所述辅助信息确定第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于所述终端设备监听寻呼消息；发送所述第一配置信息。
该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第二通信装置是网络设备为例。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备，或者为接入网设备。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
按照所述第一配置信息发送寻呼消息；或，
接收第二配置信息，根据所述第一配置信息和所述第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，并按照所述第三配置信息发送寻呼消息。
如果仅由该网络设备来确定配置信息，则该网络设备在确定第一配置信息后就可以按照第一配置信息来发送寻呼消息。或者，如果除了该网络设备之外还有其他的网络设备也会确定配置信息，即第二配置信息，则该网络设备可以接收来自其他网络设备的第二配置信息，并根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三 配置信息，以按照第三配置信息来发送寻呼消息。该网络设备根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息的方式，与第一方面的相应的实施方式所述的终端设备根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息的方式是相同的，从而使得网络设备和终端设备确定的第三配置信息相同，提高寻呼成功率。
结合第二方面的第一种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式中，
所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第二方面的第二种可选的实施方式，在第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第二方面的第三种可选的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第五种可选的实施方式中，所述网络设备为核心网设备，所述方法还包括：
将所述辅助信息和所述第一配置信息发送给服务于所述终端设备的接入网设备。
核心网设备可以将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，从而接入网设备也能根据辅助信息确定相应的配置信息，例如第二配置信息。另外，核心网设备还可以将第一配置信息发送给接入网设备，例如接入网设备未确定配置信息，则接入网设备可以确定按照第一配置信息寻呼终端设备；或者，接入网设备也确定了第二配置信息，则接入网设备也可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息。
结合第二方面或第二方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第二方面的第四种可选的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第二方面的第六种可选的实施方式中，所述网络设备为接入网设备，所述方法还包括：
将所述第一放松配置发送给服务于所述终端设备的核心网设备。
接入网设备还可以将第一配置信息发送给核心网设备，例如核心网设备未确定配置信息，则核心网设备可以确定是按照第一配置信息寻呼终端设备；或者，核心网设备也确定了第二配置信息，则核心网设备也可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息。
关于第二方面或第二方面的一些的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第一方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第三方面，提供第三种通信方法，该方法包括：确定满足第一放松条件，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件；根据所述第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息，终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
该方法可由第三通信装置执行，第三通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第三通信装置是终端设备为例。
在本申请实施例中，如果满足第一放松条件，终端设备就可按照第一放松配置来监听寻呼消息。终端设备在第一放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，由于监听寻呼消息的次数有所减少，因此可以减小终端设备的功耗。而且是否满足放松条件可由终端设备自行确定，无需网络设备指示，使得确定方式更为灵活。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一放松条件包括如下的一项或多项：
在第一时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限；
在第二时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或，
所述终端设备的位置是固定的。
第一放松条件可以包括一种放松条件或多种放松条件。其中，如果第一放松条件为一种放松条件，则该放松条件可以包括如上的一项或多项；或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，则所述多种放松条件中的任一种可以包括如上的一项或多项，且多种放松条件中的不同放松条件所包括的内容可以相同或不同。例如，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限；或者，第一放松条件包括在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或者，第一放松条件包括终端设备的位置是固定的；或者，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，以及包括在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或者，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，以及终端设备的位置是固定的，等等。或者，第一放松条件也可以包括其他条件，具体的不做限制，只要第一放松条件能够表明终 端设备的状态较为稳定，或者表明终端设备的信道条件较好即可。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，
所述第一放松配置包括第三时长，所述正常配置包括第四时长，所述第三时长小于所述第四时长，所述第三时长和所述第四时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第一放松配置包括第一数量，所述正常配置包括第二数量，所述第一数量小于所述第二数量，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
例如，第一放松配置包括第三时长，第三时长可以小于第四时长，第四时长是正常配置下的一个寻呼传输窗的时长。通过减小寻呼传输窗的时长，可以减少终端设备监听的时间，从而减小终端设备的功耗，达到“放松”的目的。又例如，第一放松配置包括第一数量，第一数量可以小于第二数量，第二数量是正常配置下的一个寻呼传输窗包括的寻呼时机的个数，或者说是正常配置下终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。通过减少终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数，以减小终端设备的功耗，达到“放松”的目的。
结合第三方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，
所述第一数量个寻呼时机为一个寻呼传输窗内按照时域顺序的前N个寻呼时机，N为所述第一数量；和/或，
第一时间间隔大于第二时间间隔，所述第一时间间隔为所述第一数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔，所述第二时间间隔为所述第二数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔。
第一数量个寻呼时机是在第一放松配置下的一个寻呼传输窗包括的寻呼时机的个数。例如，第一数量个寻呼时机可以是正常配置下的一个寻呼传输窗内包括的前N个寻呼时机或后N个寻呼时机(按照时域顺序)，这样可以使得终端设备实现连续监听，减小因为频繁在监听和不监听之间切换而带来的功耗；或者，第一数量个寻呼时机可以是正常配置下的一个寻呼传输窗内包括的任意N个寻呼时机，N为第一数量，即，本申请实施例对于第一数量个寻呼时机的时域位置不做限制。
第一数量个寻呼时机中，每两个在时域上相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔(例如称为第一时间间隔)可以大于第二数量个寻呼时机中，每两个在时域上相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔(例如称为第二时间间隔)，第二数量个寻呼时机是在正常配置下的一个寻呼传输窗包括的寻呼时机的个数。即，第一数量个寻呼时机两两之间的时间间隔大于第二数量个寻呼时机两两之间的时间间隔，在寻呼传输窗的时长一定的情况下，这也就表明第一数量小于第二数量，从而终端设备监听第一数量个寻呼时机，能够减小终端设备的功耗。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第三方面的第三种可 能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
例如，网络设备可以向终端设备发送指示信息，以指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。从而终端设备是否能够放松监听寻呼消息也尽量在网络设备的控制范围内，例如终端设备处于放松监听寻呼消息的状态，则网络设备也可以相应调整发送寻呼消息的方式，以提高对终端设备的寻呼成功率。例如，指示信息可以通过显式方式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。例如指示信息占用1个或多个比特(bit)，这1个或多个比特可以指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。以指示信息占用1个比特为例，如果这1比特的取值为“1”，则指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，而如果这1比特的取值为“0”，则指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息；或者，如果这1比特的取值为“0”，则指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，而如果这1比特的取值为“1”，则指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第三方面的第四种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
如果网络设备是核心网设备，那么核心网设备可以通过NAS消息向终端设备发送指示信息。如果终端设备是通过注册请求消息向网络设备发送请求信息，那么核心网设备用于发送指示信息的NAS消息例如为注册接受消息，注册接受消息还可以用于为终端设备配置eDRX的相关参数，例如配置eDRX的周期等。或者，如果网络设备是接入网设备，那么接入网设备可以通过RRC消息或其他消息向终端设备发送指示信息，例如一种RRC消息为用于将终端设备释放到RRC非活跃态或RRC空闲态的RRC释放消息。或者，如果网络设备是接入网设备，那么接入网设备也可以通过广播消息发送指示信息。例如未执行S601，接入网设备要向一个小区内的多个终端设备发送该指示信息，则接入网设备可以通广播消息发送。该广播消息例如为***消息，或者也可以是其他消息。
结合第三方面的第四种可能的实施方式或第三方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，
所述方法还包括：接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或，
所述指示信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置。
例如，指示信息可以通过显式方式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。在这种实施方式下，网络设备还可以发送配置信息，终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的配置信息，配置信息可以是由网络设备所配置的。 当然，如果指示信息指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，则网络设备可以发送配置信息，而如果指示信息指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息，网络设备也可以不必发送配置信息。或者，指示信息也可以通过隐式指示方式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。在这种情况下，例如指示信息就是所述的配置信息，在这种情况下，配置信息可以称为配置信息，也可以称为指示信息，配置信息可以隐式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。相当于网络设备通过发送配置信息，隐式指示了允许放松监听寻呼消息。这样，既使得终端设备能够知晓放松条件和放松配置之间的对应关系，也无需发送额外的信息作为指示信息，有助于节省信令开销。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第三方面的第六种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，
所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
配置信息可以包括如下的一项或多项：M种放松条件的信息，N种放松配置的信息，或，M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系。例如，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息；或者，配置信息包括N种放松配置的信息；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息和N种放松配置的信息；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息，以及M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括N种放松配置的信息，以及M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息，N种放松配置的信息，以及，M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系。例如，M＝1，即只有一种放松条件，那么配置信息可以包括该放松条件和N种放松配置，无需包括该放松条件和N种放松配置之间的对应关系，因为该放松条件自然是与N种放松配置相对应的。又例如，N＝1，即只有一种放松配置，那么配置信息可以包括M种放松条件和该放松配置，无需包括M种放松条件和该放松配置之间的对应关系，因为该放松配置自然是与M种放松条件都对应的。再例如，M>1，N>1，如果是这种情况，则配置信息可以包括M种放松条件，N种放松配置，以及M种放松条件和N种放松配置之间的对应关系，从而使得终端设备明确究竟是哪种放松条件与哪种放松配置相对应。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第三方面的第七种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
例如，终端设备可以在有节省功耗的需求时向网络设备发送请求信息，以请求放松监听寻呼消息，这样使得终端设备对于寻呼消息的放松监听能够更为符合终端设备的需求，且也可以让网络设备明确终端设备是否在放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第三方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第九种可能的实施方 式中，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
网络设备如果是核心网设备，则终端设备可以通过NAS消息向网络设备发送请求信息，该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是其他NAS消息。或者，网络设备如果是接入网设备，则终端设备可以通过RRC消息或其他消息向网络设备发送请求信息，例如一种RRC消息为终端设备向网络设备发送辅助信息的消息，例如UE辅助信息消息。这里所述的辅助信息例如包括终端设备所期望的配置，或包括终端设备的业务信息，或包括终端设备所期望的配置以及终端设备的业务信息等。其中，终端设备的业务信息，例如包括终端设备正在进行的业务的参数，例如终端设备正在进行的业务的类型或该业务所需要的带宽等。终端设备所期望的配置，例如为终端设备所期望的空口配置，例如终端设备所期望的时隙格式等。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第三方面的第九种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
确定不满足K种放松条件，所述K种放松条件为全部放松条件或部分放松条件，所述第一放松条件是所述K种放松条件中的一种，K为大于或等于1的整数；
根据所述正常配置监听寻呼消息。
这里所述的不满足K种放松条件，是指对于K种放松条件均不满足，或者说，不满足K种放松条件中的任何一种放松条件。K种放松条件包括所配置的放松条件中的部分放松条件或全部放松条件。在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以周期性或非周期性地确定是否满足所述的K种放松条件。例如终端设备在确定满足第一放松条件后，根据第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息。而在此后终端设备又确定满足K种放松条件中的第二放松条件，那么终端设备又可以改为根据第二放松条件对应的第二放松配置监听寻呼消息。或者，在此后终端设备确定不满足K种放松条件，即，对于K种放松条件中的每种都不满足，那么终端设备可以恢复对于寻呼消息的正常监听，即，终端设备可以按照正常配置监听寻呼消息，以减小漏检寻呼消息的概率。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第三方面的第十种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第三方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一放松条件是K种放松条件中的一种，所述K种放松条件还包括第二放松条件，所述第二放松条件对应于第二放松配置，所述第一放松配置与所述第二放松配置不同，K为大于或等于1的整数。
放松条件可以包括多种，不同的放松条件对应的放松配置可以相同，也可以不同，较为灵活。例如，K种放松条件包括第一放松条件和第二放松条件，第二放松条件对应第二放松配置，第一放松配置和第二放松配置可以是同一种配置， 或者，第一放松配置和第二放松配置也可以是不同的配置。
第四方面，提供第四种通信方法，该方法包括：确定允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息；发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
该方法可由第四通信装置执行，第四通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为网络设备，或者为设置在网络设备中的用于实现网络设备的功能的芯片，或者为用于实现网络设备的功能的其他部件。在下文的介绍过程中，以第四通信装置是网络设备为例。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备或接入网设备。
例如终端设备还向网络设备发送了终端设备的能力信息，或者网络设备根据终端设备的注册信息获得了终端设备的能力信息，且终端设备的能力信息表明终端设备有省电需求，则网络设备可以确定允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息，则所述的指示信息可以指示允许放松监听寻呼消息；而如果终端设备的能力信息表明终端设备没有省电需求，则网络设备可以确定不允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息，则所述的指示信息可以指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。或者网络设备也可以通过其他方式确定是否允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息。通过网络设备的指示，使得终端设备的行为尽量在网络设备的控制范围内。例如指示信息指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，则终端设备如果满足相应的放松条件，就可以按照该放松条件对应的放松配置监听寻呼消息，例如终端设备满足第一放松条件，则可以按照第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息。终端设备在第一放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，由于监听寻呼消息的次数有所减少，因此可以减小终端设备的功耗。而且是否满足相应的放松条件可由终端设备自行确定，无需网络设备指示，使得确定方式更为灵活。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，
所述方法还包括：发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或者，
所述指示信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置；
其中，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件，所述终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式或第四方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实施方式或第四方面的第二种可能的实施方式或第四方面的第三种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述终端设备的请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第四方面的第四种可能的实施方式，在第四方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
关于第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第五方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第一通信装置。所述第一通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第一通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块，可选的，还可以包括收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果第一通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第五方面的介绍过程中，继续以所述第一通信装置是终端设备，以及，以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中，
所述处理模块，用于确定辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
所述收发模块，用于发送所述辅助信息。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收第一配置信息和/或第二配置信息；
所述处理模块，还用于根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，所述第三配置信息是根据接收的配置信息确定的。
结合第五方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，
所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第五方面的第三种可能的实施方式，在第五方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
关于第五方面或第五方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第一方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第六方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第二通信装置。所述第二通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第二通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块，可选的，还可以包括收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备或接入网设备。下面以第二通信装置是网络设备为例。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果第二通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第六方面的介绍过程中，继续以所述第二通信装置是网络设备，以及，以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中，
所述收发模块，用于接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
所述处理模块，用于根据所述辅助信息确定第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于所述终端设备监听寻呼消息；
所述收发模块，还用于发送所述第一配置信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块还用于：
按照所述第一配置信息发送寻呼消息；或，
接收第二配置信息，根据所述第一配置信息和所述第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，并按照所述第三配置信息发送寻呼消息。
结合第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第六方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第六方面的第三种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第六方面的第四种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，所述网络设备为核心网设备，所述收发模块，还用于将所述辅助信息和所述第一配置信息发送给服务于所述终端设备的接入网设备。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第六方面的第四种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第六方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，所述网络设备为接入网设备，所述收发模块，还用于将所述第一放松配置发送给服务于所述终端设备的核心网设备。
关于第六方面或第六方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第七方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第三通信装置。所述第三通信装置用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第三通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块，可选的，还可以包括收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第三通信装置是终端设备为例。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果第三通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第七方面的介绍过程中，继续以所述第三通信装置是终端设备，以及，以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中，
所述处理模块，用于确定满足第一放松条件，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件；
所述收发模块，用于根据所述第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息，所述终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一放松条件包括如下的一项或多项：
在第一时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限；
在第二时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或，
所述终端设备的位置是固定的。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，
所述第一放松配置包括第三时长，所述正常配置包括第四时长，所述第三时长小于所述第四时长，所述第三时长和所述第四时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第一放松配置包括第一数量，所述正常配置包括第二数量，所述第一数量小于所述第二数量，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
结合第七方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第三种可能的实施方 式中，
所述第一数量个寻呼时机为一个寻呼传输窗内按照时域顺序的前N个寻呼时机，N为所述第一数量；和/或，
第一时间间隔大于第二时间间隔，所述第一时间间隔为所述第一数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔，所述第二时间间隔为所述第二数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第七方面的第三种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第七方面的第四种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
结合第七方面的第四种可能的实施方式或第七方面的第五种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第六种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或，
所述指示信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第七方面的第六种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第七种可能的实施方式中，所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第七方面的第七种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第八种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第七方面的第八种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第九种可能的实施方式中，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第七方面的第九种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第十种可能的实施方式中，
所述处理模块，还用于确定不满足K种放松条件，所述K种放松条件为全部放松条件或部分放松条件，所述第一放松条件是所述K种放松条件中的一种，K为大于或等于1的整数；
所述收发模块，还用于根据所述正常配置监听寻呼消息。
结合第七方面或第七方面的第一种可能的实施方式至第七方面的第十种可能的实施方式中的任一种可能的实施方式，在第七方面的第十一种可能的实施方式中，所述第一放松条件是K种放松条件中的一种，所述K种放松条件还包括第二放松条件，所述第二放松条件对应于第二放松配置，所述第一放松配置与所述第二放松配置不同，K为大于或等于1的整数。
关于第七方面或各种第七方面的可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第八方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第四通信装置。所述第四通信装置用于执行上述第四方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第四通信装置可以包括用于执行第四方面或任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，发送模块和接收模块可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备或接入网设备。下面以第四通信装置是网络设备为例。例如，所述收发模块也可以通过收发器实现，所述处理模块也可以通过处理器实现。或者，发送模块可以通过发送器实现，接收模块可以通过接收器实现，发送器和接收器可以是不同的功能模块，或者也可以是同一个功能模块，但能够实现不同的功能。如果第四通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器(或，发送器和接收器)例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。在第八方面的介绍过程中，继续以所述第四通信装置是网络设备，以及，以所述处理模块和所述收发模块为例进行介绍。其中，
所述处理模块，用于确定允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息；
所述收发模块，用于发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的第一种可能的实施方式中，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实施方式，在第八方面的第二种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或者，
所述指示信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置；
其中，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件，所述终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实施方式或第八方面的第二种可能的实施方式，在第八方面的第三种可能的实施方式中，所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
结合第八方面或第八方面的第一种可能的实施方式或第八方面的第二种可能的实施方式或第八方面的第三种可能的实施方式，在第八方面的第四种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述终端设备的请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
结合第八方面的第四种可能的实施方式，在第八方面的第五种可能的实施方式中，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
关于第八方面或第八方面的各种可能的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第四方面或第四方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第九方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第一通信装置。该通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，第一通信装置还可以包括一个或多个存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者，第一通信装置也可以不包括存储器，至少一个存储器可以位于第一通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，第一通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使第一通信装置执行上述第一方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中，如果第一通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第二通信装置。该通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，第二通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实现 上述第二方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者，第二通信装置也可以不包括存储器，一个或多个存储器可以位于第二通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第二方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，第二通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使第二通信装置执行上述第二方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备或接入网设备。
其中，如果第二通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十一方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第三通信装置。该通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，第三通信装置还可以包括一个或多个存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者，第三通信装置也可以不包括存储器，一个或多个存储器可以位于第三通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第三方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，第三通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使第三通信装置执行上述第三方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为终端设备。
其中，如果第三通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十二方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第四通信装置。该通信装置包括一个或多个处理器，可选的，还可以包括通信接口，通信接口可用于与其他装置或设备进行通信。可选的，第四通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机指令。一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器相互耦合，用于实 现上述第四方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。或者，第四通信装置也可以不包括存储器，一个或多个存储器可以位于第四通信装置外部。一个或多个处理器、一个或多个存储器和通信接口相互耦合，用于实现上述第四方面或各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。例如，第四通信装置还可以包括一个或多个计算机程序，所述的一个或多个计算机程序被存储在一个或多个存储器中，所述的一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机指令。当一个或多个处理器执行所述一个或多个存储器存储的计算机指令时，使第四通信装置执行上述第四方面或任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为网络设备。示例性地，所述网络设备为核心网设备或接入网设备。
其中，如果第四通信装置为通信设备，通信接口例如通过所述通信设备中的收发器(或者，发送器和接收器)实现，例如所述收发器通过所述通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么通信接口例如为芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。
第十三方面，提供第一通信***，第一通信***包括第五方面所述的通信装置或第九方面所述的通信装置，以及包括第六方面所述的通信装置或第十方面所述的通信装置。
第十四方面，提供第二通信***，第二通信***包括第七方面所述的通信装置或第十一方面所述的通信装置，以及包括第八方面所述的通信装置或第十二方面所述的通信装置。
第十五方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十六方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十七方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十八方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第十九方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行 上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十一方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十二方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
在本申请实施例中，网络设备可以根据辅助信息确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。辅助信息可以指示终端设备的状态等，从而网络设备所配置的寻呼参数能够较为符合终端设备的实际需求。
附图说明
图1A为终端设备按照eDRX周期接收寻呼消息的一种示例；
图1B为终端设备按照eDRX周期接收寻呼消息的另一种示例；
图2为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信方法的流程图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法的流程图；
图7A为终端设备的剩余电量的一种示意图；
图7B为未采用本申请实施例提供的方法的情况下，在经过一段时间后终端设备的剩余电量的一种示意图；
图7C为在采用本申请实施例提供的方法的情况下，在经过一段时间后终端设备的剩余电量的一种示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的第一种终端设备的一种示意性框图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的第一种网络设备的一种示意性框图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的第二种终端设备的一种示意性框图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的第二种网络设备的一种示意性框图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的一种示意性框图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的另一示意性框图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的再一示意性框图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的又一示意性框图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)终端设备，包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，具体的，包括向用户提供语音的设备，或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备，或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与核心网进行通信，与RAN交换语音或数据，或与RAN交互语音和数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications，M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things，IoT)终端设备、签约单元(subscriber unit)、签约站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point，AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如，可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)，具有移动终端设备的计算机，便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如，个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备，例如功耗较低的设备，或存储能力有限的设备，或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification，RFID)、传感器、全球定位***(global positioning system，GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。
而如上介绍的各种终端设备，如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)，都可以认为是车载终端设备，车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit，OBU)。
本申请实施例中，终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为，能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。
本申请实施例中，用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备，也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中，芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他 分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
2)网络设备，例如包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，例如基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备，或者例如，一种车到一切(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)技术中的网络设备为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与IP分组进行相互转换，作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X应用的固定基础设施实体，可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以包括LTE***或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation，5G)NR***(也简称为NR***)中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network，Cloud RAN)***中的集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，本申请实施例并不限定。
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备，在本申请实施例中，核心网设备例如包括5G***中的访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)或用户平面功能(user plane function，UPF)等，或者包括4G***中的移动管理实体(mobility management entity，MME)等。
本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
3)DRX，简单来说，在DRX机制下，终端设备可以周期性地进入睡眠状态，不需要监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)。
4)增强型非连续接收(extended DRX，eDRX)，与DRX相比，eDRX具有更长的周期，即终端设备可以周期性地“休眠”更长的时间再“醒来”一次。一个eDRX周期内包括一个寻呼传输窗(paging transmission window，PTW)，该PTW包括一个或多个PO。在一个eDRX周期中，终端设备会在PTW中的一个或多个PO“醒来”监听PDCCH，在“休眠”时间不需要监听PDCCH。
5)RRC状态，终端设备有3种RRC状态：RRC连接(connected)态、RRC空闲态和RRC非激活态。
RRC连接态(或，也可以简称为连接态。在本文中，“连接态”和“RRC连接态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备与网络建立了RRC连接，可以进行数据传输。
RRC空闲态(或，也可以简称为空闲态。在本文中，“空闲态”和“RRC空闲态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备没有与网络建立RRC连接，基站没有存储该终端设备的上下文。如果终端设备需要从RRC空闲态进入RRC 连接态，则需要发起RRC连接建立过程。
RRC非活跃态(或，也可称为RRC非激活态，或简称为非活跃态或非激活态。在本文中，“去活动态”、“非活跃态”、“去活跃态”、“去激活态”、“非激活态”、“RRC非激活态”或“RRC去激活态”等，是同一概念，这几种称呼可以互换)：终端设备之前在锚点基站进入了RRC连接态，然后锚点基站释放了该RRC连接，但是锚点基站保存了该终端设备的上下文。如果该终端设备需要从RRC非活跃态再次进入RRC连接态，则需要在当前驻留的基站发起RRC连接恢复过程(或者称为RRC连接重建立过程)。因为终端设备可能处于移动状态，因此终端设备当前驻留的基站与终端设备的锚点基站可能是同一基站，也可能是不同的基站。RRC恢复过程相对于RRC建立过程来说，时延更短，信令开销更小。但是基站需要保存终端设备的上下文，会占用基站的存储开销。
6)本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的大小、内容、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如，第一配置信息和第二配置信息，只是为了区分不同的配置信息，而并不是表示这两个配置信息的内容、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。
前文介绍了本申请实施例所涉及到的一些名词概念，下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。
5G NR技术沿用了LTE***中的DRX机制。DRX机制包括DRX周期，处于RRC连接态的终端设备在DRX周期内会周期性地“醒来”一段时间，终端设备“醒来”的时间称为持续(on duration)时间段，在DRX周期中除on duration时间段之外的其他时间，终端设备可以保持“休眠”状态，以降低功耗。另外，终端设备在处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态时，若核心网或基站需要向终端设备发送下行数据，例如有电话需要呼入该终端设备，或者有下行数据需要发送给该终端设备，则核心网或基站会先向终端设备发送寻呼消息，用于寻呼终端设备。终端设备收到寻呼消息后，会发起RRC连接建立过程从而接收下行数据。
处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态的终端设备只在自己的PO“醒来”接收寻呼消息。其中，终端设备在自己的PO，首先接收用于指示寻呼消息的下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)，该DCI可以在物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)发送。该DCI也可称为寻呼控制 信息，寻呼控制信息用于指示寻呼消息发送的时频资源。在接收寻呼控制信息之后，终端设备接收寻呼消息，若寻呼消息携带了该终端设备的ID，则表示该终端设备被寻呼，该终端设备需要发起RRC连接建立过程接入基站，以接收下行数据。或者，若寻呼消息中未携带该终端设备的ID，则表示该终端设备未被寻呼，该终端设备可以继续“休眠”，等到下一个PO再“醒来”。
对于配置了DRX的终端设备，如果处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态，则会在DRX周期内包括的PO“醒来”接收寻呼消息。
考虑进一步降低功耗，在DRX的机制上引入了eDRX机制，eDRX相当于将DRX的周期扩展为更大的值，即终端设备可以“休眠”更长的时间再“醒来”一次。由于终端设备在eDRX机制下“休眠”的时间更长，每次“醒来”接收寻呼消息时需要保证更高的可靠性，以避免多休眠一个eDRX周期所导致的时延，因此在eDRX中引入了PTW。一个eDRX周期内包括一个PTW，该PTW包括一个或多个PO。在一个eDRX周期中，终端设备会在PTW中的一个或多个PO“醒来”接收寻呼消息，其中，终端设备在每个PO可以先监听寻呼控制信息，如果监听到寻呼控制信息，则终端设备可以继续在该PO监听寻呼消息，如果该寻呼消息包括该终端设备的ID，则终端设备无需再监听该PTW内剩余的PO，而如果该寻呼消息不包括该终端设备的ID，则终端设备等到下个PO时，再监听寻呼控制信息，以此类推，直到成功接收到包含该终端设备的ID的寻呼消息或者该PTW结束为止；而如果终端设备在一个PO未监听到寻呼控制信息，则终端设备不在该PO监听寻呼消息，而是等到下个PO时，再监听寻呼控制信息，以此类推，直到成功接收到包含该终端设备的ID的寻呼消息或者该PTW结束为止。
目前，核心网设备会为终端设备配置寻呼参数，例如配置PTW的时长等，终端设备可按照核心网设备配置的寻呼参数监听寻呼消息。但核心网设备为终端设备配置的寻呼参数可能并不符合终端设备的实际需求，例如终端设备本身无需频繁监听寻呼消息，但核心网设备为终端设备配置的PTW的时长较长，导致终端设备需要多次监听寻呼消息，不利于终端设备的节能。
另外，可参考图1A，为终端设备按照eDRX周期接收寻呼消息的一种示例。图1A以一个PTW包括5个PO为例，且图1A给出了3个PTW。图1A上面的部分表示基站或核心网设备对应的部分，下面的部分表示终端设备对应的部分。例如基站或核心网设备在其中的第二个PTW内的PO发送了寻呼控制信息，终端设备在第二个PTW内的第一个PO检测寻呼控制信息失败，但终端设备在第二个PO检测寻呼控制信息成功(如图1A中的箭头所示)、并检测到包含该终端设备的ID的寻呼消息。图1A以该寻呼控制信息寻呼了该终端设备为例，则终端设备可以无需在第二个PTW内剩余的3个PO中进行检测，图1A中对应于UE侧的画斜线的方框表示终端设备无需检测的3个PO。而如果该寻呼控制信息并未寻呼该终端设备，即寻呼消息没有包含该终端设备的ID，则终端设备还需继续在第二个PTW内剩余的PO中进行检测。
又例如，可参考图1B，为终端设备按照eDRX周期接收寻呼消息的另一种示例。图1B也以一个PTW包括5个PO为例，且图1B给出了3个PTW。图1B上面的部分表示基站或核心网设备对应的部分，下面的部分表示终端设备对应的部分。例如基站或核心网在这三个PTW内均未发送任何寻呼控制信息以及寻呼消息，即，并未寻呼任何终端设备。但终端设备还是需要在这3个PTW中的每个PO都检测寻呼控制信息。或者，基站或核心网设备在这三个PTW内发送的寻呼控制信息以及寻呼消息都不是发给终端设备1的，即，可以有发给除终端设备1之外的其他终端设备的寻呼消息。但终端设备1由于一直没有检测到包含终端设备1的ID的寻呼消息，终端设备1还是需要在这3个PTW中的每个PO都检测寻呼控制信息。
可见，在一个PTW中，可能所有的终端设备都未被寻呼，即基站或核心网在该PTW中不会发送寻呼消息。但是所有的终端设备还是需要监听该PTW中的所有的PO，以确定是否被寻呼。但在这种情况下，终端设备显然不会收到寻呼消息，相当于做了无用功，导致终端设备功耗的浪费。或者，在一个PTW中，只有部分终端设备被寻呼，但是其他未被寻呼的终端设备还是需要监听该PTW中的所有的PO，以确定是否被寻呼。但在这种情况下，其他未被寻呼的终端设备显然不会收到包含自己终端设备的ID的寻呼消息，相当于做了无用功，导致功耗的浪费。
综上可知，目前的寻呼机制不利于终端设备的节能。
鉴于此，提供本申请实施例的技术方案。在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以向网络设备发送辅助信息，那么网络设备可以根据辅助信息确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。辅助信息可以指示终端设备的状态等，从而网络设备所配置的寻呼参数能够较为符合终端设备的实际需求。例如对于无需频繁监听寻呼消息的终端设备，网络设备根据辅助信息可以为此类终端设备配置时长较短的寻呼传输窗，从而终端设备监听寻呼消息的次数较少，即，终端设备在该配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，由于监听寻呼消息的次数有所减少，因此有助于降低终端设备的功耗，实现终端设备的节能。
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于***移动通信技术(the 4th generation，4G)***中，例如LTE***，或可以5G***中，例如NR***，或者还可以应用于下一代移动通信***或其他类似的通信***，具体的不做限制。
请参见图2，为本申请实施例的一种应用场景。图2包括接入网设备、核心网设备和终端设备。例如终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态。接入网设备能够寻呼该终端设备，核心网设备也能寻呼该终端设备。
该接入网设备和核心网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信***陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)***中，或者工作在NR***中，或者工作在下一代通信***或其他通信***中。
图2中的核心网设备例如为4G***中的MME，或者为5G***中的AMF，或者也可以是下一代通信***或其他通信***中的相应的核心网设备。
图2中的接入网设备例如为基站。其中，接入网设备在不同的***对应不同的设备，例如在4G***中可以对应eNB，在5G***中对应5G中的接入网设备，例如gNB。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信***中，因此图2中的接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信***中的网络设备。图2以接入网设备是基站为例，实际上参考前文的介绍，接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。另外，图2中的终端设备以手机为例，实际上根据前文对于终端设备的介绍可知，本申请实施例的终端设备不限于手机。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。在本申请的各个实施例中，寻呼传输窗例如为PTW，或者也可以有其他名称，只要寻呼传输窗包括一个或多个用于接收寻呼消息的寻呼时机即可。寻呼传输窗也可以理解为时间窗，该时间窗内可包括一个或多个PO。
本申请实施例提供第一种通信方法，请参见图3，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC空闲态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是核心网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S301、终端设备确定辅助信息，所述的辅助信息可用于确定为该终端设备配置的寻呼参数。
辅助信息例如包括如下的一项或多项：终端设备的类型信息，终端设备的移动状态信息，终端设备所在的位置信息，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，或，终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。例如，辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备的移动状态信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备所在的位置信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息和终端设备所在的位置信息；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长和终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数；或者，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长和终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期；等等。其中，终端设备所期望的在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期的长度，可以是寻呼传输窗内的相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。
终端设备的类型信息，可以指示终端设备的运动状态。例如，终端设备的类型信息可以指示终端设备是位置固定的摄像头等。根据终端设备的类型信息可以确定终端设备是否位置固定，如果终端设备的位置固定，可以认为终端设备处于 静止状态，如果终端设备的位置不固定，可以认为终端设备处于移动状态，或者认为终端设备可能处于移动状态。如果终端设备的位置固定，或者说如果终端设备处于静止状态，则终端设备的信道条件较为稳定，可能并不需要多次监听就能正常接收寻呼消息；而如果终端设备的位置不固定，或者说如果终端设备处于移动状态或可能处于移动状态，则终端设备的信道条件可能不够稳定，可能需要较多次监听才能保证正常接收寻呼消息。
终端设备的移动状态信息，可以指示终端设备的移动状态。例如终端设备的移动状态信息可以指示终端设备处于静止状态或移动状态，或者可以指示终端设备当前的速度，或者可以指示终端设备当前处于高速移动状态或低速移动状态，其中，究竟何种速度是“高速”何种速度是“低速”，需要预先配置。如果终端设备处于静止状态，或终端设备的速度较低，或者终端设备处于低速移动状态，则终端设备的信道条件较为稳定，可能并不需要多次监听就能正常接收寻呼消息；而如果终端设备处于移动状态，或终端设备的速度较高，或者终端设备处于高速移动状态，则终端设备的信道条件可能不够稳定，可能需要较多次监听才能保证正常接收寻呼消息。
终端设备的位置信息，可以指示终端设备在终端设备当前驻留的小区中所处的位置，例如指示终端设备位于当前驻留的小区的中心区域或边缘区域。如果终端设备处于当前驻留的小区的中心区域，则终端设备的信道条件较为稳定，可能并不需要多次监听就能正常接收寻呼消息；而如果终端设备处于当前驻留的小区的边缘区域，则终端设备的信道条件可能不够稳定，可能需要较多次监听才能保证正常接收寻呼消息。
终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，例如为终端设备根据终端设备当前的状态所确定的期望为该终端设备配置的寻呼传输窗的时长(例如，一个寻呼传输窗的时长)。所述的终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，可以小于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的长度，或者等于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的长度，或者也可以大于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的长度。本申请实施例所述的正常配置，是指现有技术中终端设备的寻呼配置，即，现有技术中网络不参考辅助信息为终端设备配置的寻呼参数。
终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，例如为终端设备根据终端设备当前的状态所确定的期望为该终端设备配置的在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数。所述的终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，可以小于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数，或者等于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数，或者也可以大于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数。
终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期，例如为终端设备根据终端设备当前的状态所确定的期望为该终端设备配置的在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。所述的终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期，可以小于在目前的正常配置下终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期，或者等于在目前的正 常配置下终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期，或者也可以大于在目前的正常配置下终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期。例如，在目前的正常配置下，终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期为1个DRX周期(在前文介绍了，与DRX相比，eDRX具有更长的周期，即，eDRX周期的长度大于DRX周期的长度，例如理解为，1个eDRX周期的长度等于多个DRX周期的长度，而1个eDRX周期内包括的PTW中，两个相邻的PO之间的间隔为1个DRX周期)，终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期例如为2个DRX周期，或者为1个DRX周期，或者为0.5个DRX周期。
也就是说，辅助信息可以包括终端设备的状态信息，例如终端设备的类型信息、终端设备的移动状态信息或终端设备所在的位置信息等，均可以视为终端设备的状态信息。或者，辅助信息可以包括终端设备的期望配置信息，例如终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长、终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数、或终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期等，均可以视为终端设备的期望配置信息。
辅助信息可用于确定为该终端设备配置的寻呼参数，例如，辅助信息可用于确定为该终端设备配置的寻呼传输窗。
S302、终端设备将辅助信息发送给核心网设备，核心网设备接收来自终端设备的辅助信息。
例如终端设备可以将辅助信息包括在非接入层(non-access stratum，NAS)消息中发送给核心网设备。该NAS消息例如为注册请求(registeration request)消息，或者也可以是其他的NAS消息，例如可以是注册完成之后的NAS消息。
S303、核心网设备根据辅助信息确定第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于终端设备监听寻呼消息，第一配置信息可以理解为核心网设备为终端设备配置的寻呼参数，或理解为寻呼配置。或者，本申请实施例所述的第一配置信息，也可以称为第二配置信息。
核心网设备获得辅助信息后，可以根据辅助信息确定第一配置信息。其中，如果终端设备在第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在所述的正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，则也可以将第一配置信息称为第一放松配置。也就是说，终端设备在第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，那么相对于终端设备正常监听寻呼消息的机制来说，终端设备处于第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息对于终端设备来说是一种“放松”，因此称为“放松配置”。或者，如果终端设备在第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息的次数大于在所述的正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，则也可以将第一配置信息称为第一收紧配置。也就是说，终端设备在第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，大于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，那么相对于终端设备正常监听寻呼消息的机制来说，终端设备处于第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息对于终端设备来说是一种“收紧”，因此称为“收紧配置”。其中，终端设备在第一配置信息下监听寻呼消息的次数是指，终端设备在第一配置信息下，在一个寻呼传 输窗内监听寻呼消息的次数；终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数是指，终端设备在正常配置下，在一个寻呼传输窗内监听寻呼消息的次数。
核心网设备确定的第一配置信息，例如包括第一时长、第一数量、第一序列号信息或第一周期中的一种或多种。例如，第一配置信息包括第一时长；或者，第一配置信息包括第一数量；或者，第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息；或者，第一配置信息包括第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一数量；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一数量和第一周期；或者，第一配置信息包括第一时长、第一数量和第一周期，等等。第一时长是一个寻呼传输窗的时长，第一数量是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数，第一序列号信息是指终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的序列号(或者称为索引或编号等)，第一周期是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。第一周期的时长可以是寻呼传输窗内相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。当然，核心网设备确定的第一配置信息还可以包括其他的信息，具体的不做限制。
如果第一配置信息包括第一时长，所述的正常配置包括第四时长，那么第一时长可以小于、等于或大于第四时长，第四时长是一个寻呼传输窗的时长。如果第一配置信息包括第一数量，所述的正常配置包括第四数量，那么第一数量可以小于、等于或大于第四数量，第四数量是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数。如果第一配置信息包括第一周期，所述的正常配置包括第四周期，那么第一周期的时长可以小于、等于或大于第四周期的时长，第四周期是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。如果第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，所述的正常配置包括第四序列号信息，则第一序列号信息所指示的序列号可以与第四序列号信息指示的序列号相同，或者第一序列号信息所指示的序列号多于第四序列号信息指示的序列号，或者第一序列号信息所指示的序列号少于第四序列号信息指示的序列号。第四序列号信息是指终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的序列号(或者称为索引或编号等)。
如果辅助信息包括终端设备的状态信息，则核心网设备需要根据终端设备的状态信息为终端设备确定第一配置信息。例如辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息、终端设备的移动状态信息或终端设备所在的位置信息中的一种或多种，那么核心网设备可以根据辅助信息确定第一配置信息。例如，辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息，核心网设备根据终端设备的类型信息可以确定终端设备是否位置固定。如果终端设备的位置固定，或者说如果终端设备处于静止状态，则终端设备可能并不需要多次监听寻呼消息；而如果终端设备的位置不固定，或者说如果终端设备处于移动状态或可能处于移动状态，则终端设备可能需要较多次监听寻呼消息(例如需要正常监听寻呼消息，或更为频繁地监听寻呼消息)。
又例如，辅助信息包括终端设备的移动状态信息，核心网设备可以根据终端设备的移动状态信息确定终端设备的移动状态。如果终端设备处于静止状态，或终端设备的速度较低，或者终端设备处于低速移动状态，则终端设备可能并不需 要多次监听寻呼消息；而如果终端设备处于移动状态，或终端设备的速度较高，或者终端设备处于高速移动状态，则终端设备可能需要较多次监听寻呼消息(例如需要正常监听寻呼消息，或更为频繁地监听寻呼消息)。
再例如，辅助信息包括终端设备所在的位置信息，核心网设备可以根据终端设备的位置信息确定终端设备在当前驻留的小区中所在的位置。如果终端设备处于当前驻留的小区的中心区域，则终端设备可能并不需要多次监听寻呼消息；而如果终端设备处于当前驻留的小区的边缘区域，则终端设备可能需要较多次监听寻呼消息(例如需要正常监听寻呼消息，或更为频繁地监听寻呼消息)。
如果核心网设备确定终端设备不需要多次监听寻呼消息，或者说确定终端设备无需频繁监听寻呼消息，那么，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一时长，则第一时长例如小于目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的时长。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一数量，则第一数量可以小于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，则第一序列号信息所指示的序列号例如包括在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听的部分PO的序列号。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一周期，则第一周期的时长例如小于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听PO的周期的时长。例如，第一序列号信息所指示的序列号可以包括一个PTW内的前半部分PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内的后半部分PO的序列号；或包括一个PTW内的第一个和最后一个PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内其他PO的序列号，需要强调的是这里包括的PO序列号由网络指示给UE，但指示哪几个PO序列号给UE不做限制。例如，如果按照目前的正常配置，则终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期为一个DRX周期(可以理解为，一个eDRX周期的长度等于多个DRX周期的长度，而一个eDRX周期内包括的PTW中，两个相邻的PO之间的间隔为一个DRX周期)，那么第一周期例如为2个DRX周期或3个DRX周期等。
如果核心网设备确定终端设备需要较多次监听寻呼消息(例如需要正常监听寻呼消息，或更为频繁地监听寻呼消息)，那么，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一时长，则第一时长例如等于目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的时长，或者，第一时长也可以大于目前的正常配置下的一个PTW的时长。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一数量，则第一数量例如等于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数，或者第一数量也可以大于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的PO的个数。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一周期，则第一周期的时长例如等于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听PO的周期的长度，或者，第一周期的时长也可以大于在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听PO的周期的长度。或者，如果核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，则第一序列号信息所指示的序列号例如包括在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听的所有PO的序列号，或者，第一周期的时长也可以包括在目前的正常配置下的一个PTW内监听的所有PO的 序列号，以及包括更多PO的序列号。例如，如果按照目前的正常配置，则终端设备在一个PTW内监听PO的周期为一个DRX周期，那么第一周期例如为0.5个DRX周期等。
如果辅助信息包括终端设备期望的配置信息，则核心网设备可以根据终端设备期望的配置信息为终端设备确定第一配置信息。例如辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长、终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数、或终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期等中的一种或多种，那么核心网设备可以根据辅助信息确定第一配置信息。例如，核心网设备可以将终端设备期望的配置信息确定为第一配置信息，或者，核心网也可以结合其他因素，例如结合终端设备的能力信息等因素，最终确定第一配置信息，在这种情况下确定的第一配置信息可能与终端设备期望的配置信息相同，也可能有所不同。
例如，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，核心网设备可以根据终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长确定第一配置信息。例如核心网设备将终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长确定为第一配置信息，则第一配置信息包括第一时长，第一时长就等于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长。或者，核心网设备可再结合其他因素确定第一配置信息，例如核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一时长，第一时长等于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，或第一时长也可能大于或小于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长。又例如，核心网设备确定的第一配置信息除了包括第一时长外还可能包括其他信息，例如包括第一数量或第一周期等，具体的不做限制。
又例如，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，核心网设备可以根据终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数确定第一配置信息。例如核心网设备将终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数确定为第一配置信息，则第一配置信息包括第一数量，第一数量就等于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数。或者，核心网设备可再结合其他因素确定第一配置信息，例如核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一数量，第一数量等于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数，或第一时长也可能大于或小于终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的PO的个数。又例如，核心网设备确定的第一配置信息除了包括第一数量外还可能包括其他信息，例如包括第一时长或第一周期等，具体的不做限制。
再例如，辅助信息包括终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期，核心网设备可以根据终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期确定第一配置信息。例如核心网设备将终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期确定为第一配置信息，则第一配置信息包括第一周期，第一周期的时长就等于终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期的时长。或者，核心网设备可再结合其他因素确定第一配置信息，例如核心网设备确定的第一配置信息包括第一周期，第一周期的时长等于终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期的时长，或第一周期的时长也可能大于或小于终端设备期望的在寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期的时长。又例如，核心网设备确定的第一配置信息除了包括第一周期外还可能包 括其他信息，例如包括第一时长或第一数量等，具体的不做限制。
辅助信息包括的内容不同，则核心网设备所确定的第一配置信息可以不同。辅助信息包括的内容不同，可以是指辅助信息包括的参数的类型不同。例如，一个辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息，另一个辅助信息包括终端设备所在的位置信息，则认为这两个辅助信息包括的内容不同；又例如，一个辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，另一个辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长和终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数，则认为这两个辅助信息包括的内容不同。
或者，辅助信息包括的内容不同，也可以是指辅助信息包括的同一参数的取值不同。例如，一个辅助信息包括终端设备的类型信息，另一个辅助信息也包括终端设备的类型信息，但这两个类型信息所包括的内容不同，则认为这两个辅助信息包括的内容不同；又例如，一个辅助信息包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，另一个辅助信息也包括终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长，但这两个长度不同，则认为这两个辅助信息包括的内容不同。
核心网设备所确定的第一配置信息不同，可以是指第一配置信息包括的参数不同。例如，一种第一配置信息包括第一时长，另一种第一配置信息包括第一数量；又例如，一种第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一数量，另一种第一配置信息包括第一时长和第一周期。或者，核心网设备所确定的第一配置信息不同，也可以是指第一配置信息包括的同一种参数的取值不同。例如，一种第一配置信息包括第一时长，另一种第一配置信息也包括第一时长，但这两个第一时长的取值是不同的；又例如，一种第一配置信息包括第一周期，另一种第一配置信息也包括第一周期，但这两个第一周期的时长是不同的。
例如，一个终端设备上报的辅助信息1包括终端设备的类型信息以及终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长。终端设备的类型信息指示终端设备为固定位置的电表，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长例如为3秒。另一个终端设备上报的辅助信息2也包括终端设备的类型信息以及终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长。终端设备的类型信息指示终端设备为固定位置的摄像头，终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长例如为2秒。核心网设备根据辅助信息1确定第一配置信息1，以及根据辅助信息2确定第一配置信息2，第一配置信息1和第一配置信息2可以相同，例如第一配置信息1包括第一时长1，第一配置信息2包括第一时长2，第一时长1和第一时长2都等于3秒。或者，第一配置信息1和第一配置信息2也可以不同，例如第一配置信息1包括第一时长1，第一配置信息2包括第一时长2，第一时长1为3秒，第一时长2为2秒。
S304、核心网设备发送第一消息，终端设备接收来自核心网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以指示所述的第一配置信息。
核心网设备确定第一配置信息后，可以将第一配置信息发送给终端设备。例如核心网设备可以通过NAS消息将第一配置信息发送给终端设备。
S305、核心网设备发送第二消息，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的第二消 息。第二消息可以指示所述的第一配置信息。
核心网设备确定第一配置信息后，也可以将第一配置信息发送给接入网设备。其中，S305是可选的步骤，不是必须执行的，因此在图3中用虚线表示。
如果执行S305，那么S304可以在S305之前执行，或者S304可以在S305之后执行，或者S304和S305可以同时执行。
S306、终端设备根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息。
其中，S306是可选的步骤，不是必须执行的，因此在图3中用虚线表示。
第三配置信息是根据终端设备接收的配置信息确定的。在本申请实施例中，终端设备只是接收了第一配置信息，因此第三配置信息可以根据第一配置信息确定，例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，或者说，第三配置信息即为第一配置信息。
例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，第一配置信息包括第一时长，那么终端设备可以按照第一时长的寻呼传输窗来监听寻呼消息。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一数量，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一数量个PO，至于终端设备究竟监听哪些PO，可以由终端设备自行确定，或者由网络设备指示，或者通过协议规定等。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一序列号信息所指示的PO。再例如，第一配置信息包括第一周期，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内可按照第一周期监听PO。
在本申请实施例中，作为发送寻呼消息的核心网设备和作为监听寻呼消息的终端设备都能够明确第三配置信息，从而核心网设备可以按照第三配置信息发送寻呼消息，终端设备也能按照第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，使得核心网设备无需发送冗余的寻呼消息，节省信令开销，而终端设备也无需在更多的PO监听寻呼消息，有助于节省终端设备的功耗。
为了解决相同的技术问题，本申请实施例提供第二种通信方法，请参见图4，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC非活跃态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S401、终端设备确定辅助信息，所述的辅助信息可用于确定为该终端设备配置的寻呼参数。
关于S401的更多内容，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于S301的介绍。
S402、终端设备将辅助信息发送给核心网设备，核心网设备接收来自终端设备的辅助信息。
例如终端设备可以将辅助信息包括在NAS消息中发送给核心网设备。该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是其他的NAS消息，例如可以是注册完成之后的NAS消息。
S403、核心网设备将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的辅助信息。
因为要寻呼非活跃态的终端设备，可以由接入网设备发起寻呼，因此在本申请实施例中可以由接入网设备来为终端设备确定相应的寻呼配置。而辅助信息可用于供接入网设备确定寻呼配置，因此核心网设备可将辅助信息发送给接入网设备。
S404、终端设备将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，接入网设备接收来自终端设备的辅助信息。
其中，S402～S403与S404是并列的步骤，只需执行其中一种即可，即，或者执行S402和S403，或者执行S404，这两者不必均执行。因此，S402～S404均视为可选的步骤，在图4中用虚线表示。
也就是说，终端设备可以将辅助信息发送给核心网设备，由核心网设备转发给接入网设备，或者终端设备也可以直接将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，无需核心网设备的中转，有助于节省信令开销。
例如终端设备可以在随机接入过程中将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，例如通过4步随机接入信道(4-step random access channel，4-step RACH)的第三消息(Msg3)将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，或者通过2步RACH(2-step RACH)的消息B(MsgB)将辅助信息发送给接入网设备。或者，终端设备也可以在随机接入成功后将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，例如可通过RRC消息(如终端设备辅助信息消息(UE Assistance Information message))将辅助信息发送给接入网设备。
S405、接入网设备根据辅助信息确定第一配置信息，第一配置信息用于终端设备监听寻呼消息。或者，本申请实施例所述的第一配置信息，也可以称为第二配置信息。
关于接入网设备确定第一配置信息的方式，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于核心网设备确定第一配置信息的介绍，确定过程是类似的。即，关于S405的更多内容，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于S303的介绍。
S406、接入网设备发送第一消息，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以指示所述的第一配置信息。
接入网设备确定第一配置信息后，可以将第一配置信息发送给终端设备。例如接入网设备可以通过RRC消息将第一配置信息发送给终端设备，该RRC消息例如为用于将该终端设备释放到RRC非活跃态的RRC释放消息，或者也可以是其他RRC消息。
S407、终端设备根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息。
其中，S407是可选的步骤，不是必须执行的，在图4中用虚线表示。
第三配置信息是根据终端设备接收的配置信息确定的。在本申请实施例中，终端设备只是接收了第一配置信息，因此第三配置信息可以根据第一配置信息确定，例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，或者说，第三配置信息即为第一配置信息。
例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，第一配置信息包括第一时长，那么终端设备可以按照第一时长的寻呼传输窗来监听寻呼消息。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一数量，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一数量个PO，至于终端设备究竟监听哪些PO，可以由终端设备自行确定，或者由网络设备指示，或者通过协议规定等。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一序列号信息所指示的PO。再例如，第一配置信息包括第一周期，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内可按照第一周期监听PO。
在本申请实施例中，作为发送寻呼消息的接入网设备和作为监听寻呼消息的终端设备都能够明确第三配置信息，从而接入网设备可以按照第三配置信息发送寻呼消息，终端设备也能按照第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，使得接入网设备无需发送冗余的寻呼消息，节省信令开销，而终端设备也无需在更多的PO监听寻呼消息，有助于节省终端设备的功耗。
为了解决相同的技术问题，本申请实施例提供第三种通信方法，请参见图5，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC非活跃态或RRC空闲态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是核心网设备发起的寻呼或接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S501、终端设备确定辅助信息，所述的辅助信息可用于确定为该终端设备配置的寻呼参数。
关于S501的更多内容，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于S301的介绍。
S502、终端设备将辅助信息发送给核心网设备，核心网设备接收来自终端设备的辅助信息。
例如终端设备可以将辅助信息包括在NAS消息中发送给核心网设备。该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是其他的NAS消息，例如可以是注册完成之后的NAS消息。
S503、核心网设备将辅助信息发送给接入网设备，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的辅助信息。
S504、核心网设备根据辅助信息确定配置信息，该配置信息用于终端设备监听寻呼消息。该配置信息例如称为第一配置信息，或称为第二配置信息。
关于S504的更多内容，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于S303的介绍。
S505、核心网设备发送配置信息，终端设备接收来自核心网设备的配置信息。
核心网设备确定配置信息，可以将配置信息发送给终端设备。例如核心网设备可以通过NAS消息将配置信息发送给终端设备。
S506、接入网设备根据辅助信息确定配置信息，该配置信息用于终端设备监听寻呼消息。
如果S504中核心网设备所确定的配置信息称为第一配置信息，则S506中接入网设备确定的配置信息可称为第二配置信息；或者，如果S504中核心网设备所确定的配置信息称为第二配置信息，则S506中接入网设备确定的配置信息可称为第一配置信息。在下文中，将S504中核心网设备确定的配置信息称为配置信息1，将S506中接入网设备确定的配置信息称为配置信息2。即，配置信息1为第一配置信息，配置信息2为第二配置信息；或，配置信息1为第二配置信息，配置信息2为第一配置信息。
关于S506的更多内容，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S405的介绍。
S507、接入网设备发送配置信息2，终端设备接收来自接入网设备的配置信息2。
关于S507的更多内容，可参考图4所示的实施例中对于S406的介绍。
S508、核心网设备将配置信息1发送给接入网设备，接入网设备接收来自核心网设备的配置信息1。
其中，如果终端设备处于RRC空闲态，则S508也可以不执行。
S509、接入网设备将配置信息2发送给核心网设备，核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的配置信息2。
S508和S509均为可选的步骤，在图5中用虚线表示。
S510、终端设备根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息。
S510也是可选的步骤，在图5中用虚线表示。
第三配置信息是根据终端设备接收的配置信息确定的。在本申请实施例中，终端设备接收了第一配置信息和第二配置信息，因此第三配置信息可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定。例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同；或者第三配置信息与第二配置信息相同；或者第三配置信息与第一配置信息和第二配置信息均不同，但第三配置信息与第一配置信息和第二配置信息有关。
例如，第一配置信息包括第一时长、第一数量、第一序列号信息或第一周期中的一种或多种，关于这三种参数的解释可参考图3所示的实施例。第二配置信息包括第二时长、第二数量、第二序列号信息或第二周期中的一种或多种，关于第二时长的解释，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于第一时长的解释，关于第二数量的解释，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于第一数量的解释，关于第二序列号信息的解释，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于第一序列号信息的解释，关于第二周期的解释，可参考图3所示的实施例中对于第一周期的解释。如果第一配置信息包括第一时长，第二配置信息包括第二时长，第一时长可以等于第二时长，或者 第一时长和第二时长可以不相等；如果第一配置信息包括第一数量，第二配置信息包括第二数量，第一数量可以等于第二数量，或者第一数量和第二数量可以不相等；如果第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，第二配置信息包括第二序列号信息，第一序列号信息所指示的序列号与第二序列号信息所指示的序列号可以相同，或者也可以不同；如果第一配置信息包括第一周期，第二配置信息包括第二周期，第一周期的时长可以等于第二周期的时长，或者第一周期的时长和第二周期的时长可以不相等。
第三配置信息可包括第三时长、第三数量、第三序列号信息或第三周期中的一种或多种，第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长，第三数量是一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数，第三序列号信息是一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的序列号(或称为索引或编码等)，第三周期是在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。第三周期的时长可以是寻呼传输窗内相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。如果第三配置信息包括第三时长，且第一配置信息包括第一时长，第二配置信息包括第二时长，那么第三时长例如为第一时长和第二时长中的较小值或较大值，或者，第三时长例如为第一时长和第二时长的算术平均值或加权平均值；如果第三配置信息包括第三数量，且第一配置信息包括第一数量，第二配置信息包括第二数量，那么第三数量例如为第一数量和第二数量中的较小值或较大值，或者，第三数量例如为第一数量和第二数量的算术平均值或加权平均值；如果第三配置信息包括第三序列号信息，且第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，第二配置信息包括第二序列号信息，那么第三序列号信息例如为第一序列号信息和第二序列号信息中的较小值或较大值(例如第一序列号信息指示5个序列号，第二序列号信息指示4个序列号，则第三序列号信息可以指示4个序列号，即，第三序列号信息与第二序列号信息相同，或，第三序列号信息可以指示5个序列号，即，第三序列号信息与第一序列号信息相同)；如果第三配置信息包括第三周期，且第一配置信息包括第一周期，第二配置信息包括第二周期，那么第三周期的时长例如为第一周期的时长和第二周期的时长中的较小值或较大值，或者，第三周期的时长例如为第一周期的时长和第二周期的时长的算术平均值或加权平均值。
如果所确定的第三配置信息是第一配置信息和第三配置信息中的较大值(例如第三时长是第一时长和第二时长中的较大值)，那么可以尽量提高终端设备监听寻呼消息的成功率，减少终端设备漏检的概率。或者，如果所确定的第三配置信息是第一配置信息和第三配置信息中的较小值(例如第三时长是第一时长和第二时长中的较小值)，则可以节省终端设备的功耗。
另外，如果核心网设备也获得了第一配置信息和第二配置信息，核心网设备也可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，核心网设备和终端设备确定第三配置信息的方式是相同的，例如都选择第一配置信息和第二配置信息中的较大值作为第三配置信息，这样可以使得核心网设备和终端设备所确定的第三配置信息相同，保证二者行为的一致性。该方式例如由核心网设备设置并告知终端设备，或者通过协议规定等。如果接入网设备也获得了第一配置信息和第 二配置信息，那么接入网设备也可以根据第一配置信息和第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，接入网设备和终端设备确定第三配置信息的方式也是相同的，这样使得接入网设备和终端设备所确定的第三配置信息相同。
例如第三配置信息与第一配置信息相同，第一配置信息包括第一时长，那么终端设备可以按照第一时长的寻呼传输窗来监听寻呼消息。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一数量，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一数量个PO，至于终端设备究竟监听哪些PO，可以由终端设备自行确定，或者由网络设备指示，或者通过协议规定等。又例如，第一配置信息包括第一序列号信息，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一序列号信息所指示的PO。再例如，第一配置信息包括第一周期，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内可按照第一周期监听PO。
在本申请实施例中，作为发送寻呼消息的网络设备(例如核心网设备或接入网设备)和作为监听寻呼消息的终端设备都能够明确第三配置信息，从而网络设备可以按照第三配置信息发送寻呼消息，终端设备也能按照第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，使得网络设备无需发送冗余的寻呼消息，节省信令开销，而终端设备也无需在更多的PO监听寻呼消息，有助于节省终端设备的功耗。并且，终端设备可以根据多种配置信息(例如第一配置信息和第二配置信息)来确定最终的配置信息，可以使得所确定的配置信息更为准确，更符合多个网元的要求。
为了解决相同的技术问题，本申请实施例提供第四种通信方法，请参见图6，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。在本申请实施例中，终端设备例如处于RRC非活跃态或RRC空闲态，下文中所述的寻呼可以认为是核心网设备发起的寻呼或接入网设备发起的寻呼。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例。因为本申请实施例是以应用在图2所示的网络架构为例。因此，下文中所述的网络设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的接入网设备或核心网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图2所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S601、终端设备向网络设备发送请求信息，网络设备接收来自终端设备的请求信息。该请求信息可以用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
网络设备如果是核心网设备，则终端设备可以通过NAS消息向网络设备发送请求信息，该NAS消息例如为注册请求消息，或者也可以是其他NAS消息。或者，网络设备如果是接入网设备，则终端设备可以通过RRC消息或其他消息向网络设备发送请求信息，例如一种RRC消息为终端设备向网络设备发送辅助信息的消息，例如UE辅助信息消息。本申请实施例所述的辅助信息例如包括终端设备所期望的配置，或包括终端设备的业务信息，或包括终端设备所期望的配置以及终端设备的业务信息等。其中，终端设备的业务信息，例如包括终端设备正在进行的业务的参数，例如终端设备正在进行的业务的类型或该业务所需要的带宽等。终端设备所期望的配置，例如为终端设备所期望的空口配置，例如终端设备所期望的时隙格式等。
或者，终端设备也可以不向网络设备发送请求信息，因此S601是可选的步骤，在图6中用虚线表示。
S602、网络设备发送指示信息，终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示信息。该指示信息可指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。
如果网络设备是核心网设备，那么核心网设备可以通过NAS消息向终端设备发送指示信息。如果终端设备是通过注册请求消息向网络设备发送请求信息，那么核心网设备用于发送指示信息的NAS消息例如为注册接受消息，注册接受消息还可以用于为终端设备配置eDRX的相关参数，例如配置eDRX的周期等。
或者，如果网络设备是接入网设备，那么接入网设备可以通过RRC消息或其他消息向终端设备发送指示信息，例如一种RRC消息为用于将终端设备释放到RRC非活跃态或RRC空闲态的RRC释放消息。
或者，如果网络设备是接入网设备，那么接入网设备也可以通过广播消息发送指示信息。例如未执行S601，接入网设备要向一个小区内的多个终端设备发送该指示信息，则接入网设备可以通广播消息发送。该广播消息例如为***消息，或者也可以是其他消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，指示信息可以通过显式方式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。例如指示信息占用1个或多个比特(bit)，这1个或多个比特可以指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，或指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。以指示信息占用1个比特为例，如果这1比特的取值为“1”，则指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，而如果这1比特的取值为“0”，则指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息；或者，如果这1比特的取值为“0”，则指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，而如果这1比特的取值为“1”，则指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息。
在这种实施方式下，网络设备还可以发送配置信息，终端设备可以接收来自网络设备的配置信息，配置信息可以是由网络设备所配置的。其中，网络设备可以通过一条消息发送指示信息和配置信息，或者也可以通过不同的消息分别发送指示信息和配置信息。如果通过不同的消息分别发送指示信息和配置信息，则网络设备可以先发指示信息后发配置信息，或者可以先发配置信息后发指示信息，或者也可以同时发送指示信息和配置信息。当然，如果指示信息指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，则网络设备可以发送配置信息，而如果指示信息指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息，网络设备也可以不必发送配置信息。
所述的配置信息可以包括如下的一项或多项：M种放松条件的信息，N种放松配置的信息，或，M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系。例如，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息；或者，配置信息包括N种放松配置的信息；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息和N种放松配置的信息；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息，以及M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括N种放松配置的信息，以及M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系；或者，配置信息包括M种放松条件的信息，N种放松配置的信 息，以及，M种放松条件与N种放松配置之间的对应关系。其中，M种放松条件中的一种放松条件可以对应N种放松配置中的一种或多种放松配置，N种放松配置中的每种放松配置可对应M种放松条件中的一种放松条件。因此M大于或等于N，其中M和N均为大于或等于1的整数。放松条件是指可以放松监听寻呼消息的条件，放松配置是指终端设备监听寻呼消息的配置。之所以称为“放松配置”，是因为终端设备在放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，也就是说，终端设备在放松配置下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息所需的功率，因此相对于终端设备正常监听寻呼消息的机制来说，终端设备处于放松配置下监听寻呼消息对于终端设备来说是一种“放松”，因此称为放松配置。
例如，M＝1，即只有一种放松条件，那么配置信息可以包括该放松条件和N种放松配置，无需包括该放松条件和N种放松配置之间的对应关系，因为该放松条件自然是与N种放松配置相对应的。又例如，N＝1，即只有一种放松配置，那么配置信息可以包括M种放松条件和该放松配置，无需包括M种放松条件和该放松配置之间的对应关系，因为该放松配置自然是与M种放松条件都对应的。再例如，M>1，N>1，如果是这种情况，则配置信息可以包括M种放松条件，N种放松配置，以及M种放松条件和N种放松配置之间的对应关系，从而使得终端设备明确究竟是哪种放松条件与哪种放松配置相对应。
或者，M种放松条件、N种放松配置、或放松条件和放松配置之间的对应关系中的一项或多项(即，上述的配置信息所包括的内容)，也可以预配置在网络设备和终端设备中，或者也可以通过协议规定等，那么网络设备无需向终端设备发送配置信息，有助于节省信令开销。
作为另一种可选的实施方式，指示信息可以通过隐式指示方式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。例如，指示信息就是所述的配置信息，在这种情况下，配置信息可以称为配置信息，也可以称为指示信息，配置信息可以隐式指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。相当于网络设备通过发送配置信息，隐式指示了允许放松监听寻呼消息。这样，既使得终端设备能够知晓放松条件和放松配置之间的对应关系，也无需发送额外的信息作为指示信息，有助于节省信令开销。
S603、终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件。例如在S602中介绍了M种放松条件，第一放松条件可以包括M种放松条件中的一种或多种。如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则S603是终端设备确定满足该放松条件。或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，则S603可以是终端设备确定满足所述的多种放松条件中的全部放松条件，即，在多种放松条件中的每种放松条件都满足的情况下，终端设备才认为满足第一放松条件；或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，则S603可以是终端设备确定满足所述的多种放松条件中的部分放松条件，即，在多种放松条件中的部分放松条件满足的情况下，终端设备也认为满足第一放松条件。例如，满足的放松条件的个数大于或等于多种放松条件的个数的50％，终端设备认为满足第一放松条件。
如果终端设备确定指示信息指示允许放松监听寻呼消息，则可以执行S603，而如果终端设备确定指示信息指示不允许放松监听寻呼消息，则不必执行S603。
第一放松条件例如包括如下的一项或多项：在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限，或，终端设备的位置是固定的。其中，如果第一放松条件为一种放松条件，则该放松条件可以包括如上的一项或多项；或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，则所述多种放松条件中的任一种可以包括如上的一项或多项，且多种放松条件中的不同放松条件所包括的内容可以相同或不同。例如，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限；或者，第一放松条件包括在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或者，第一放松条件包括终端设备的位置是固定的；或者，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，以及包括在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或者，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，以及终端设备的位置是固定的，等等。或者，第一放松条件也可以包括其他条件，具体的不做限制，只要第一放松条件能够表明终端设备的状态较为稳定，或者表明终端设备的信道条件较好即可。
其中，第一时长可以等于第二时长，也可以不等于第二时长。所述的参考信号例如为信道状态信息参考信号(channel-state information reference signal，CSI-RS)或同步信号和物理广播信道块(synchronization signaland physical broadcast channel block，SSB)等。所述的测量值例如为参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)、参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality，RSRQ)、或信噪比(signal-to-noise ratio，SNR)等。
例如，第一放松条件包括在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，所述的测量值为RSRP。那么终端设备在第一时长内可以正常对参考信号进行测量，例如终端设备可以计算每两次相邻的测量过程得到的RSRP的差值，或者终端设备也可以每间隔一段时间后计算当前的两次相邻的测量过程得到的RSRP的差值，那么针对第一时长内得到的RSRP，终端设备可以获得一个或多个差值。如果这一个或多个差值均小于第一门限，终端设备就可以确定在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，此时，如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，第一时长条件对应于第一放松条件包括的第一子放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一子放松条件；或者，如果这多个差值中有大于50％的差值均小于第一门限，终端设备就可以确定在第一时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限，此时，如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，第一时长条件对应于第一放松条件包括的第一子放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一子放松条件。
又例如，第一放松条件包括在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限，所述的测量值为RSRQ。终端设备在第二时长内可以正常对参考信号进行测量，可得到一个或多个RSRQ。如果这一个或多个RSRQ均大于第二门限，终端设备就可以确定在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限，此时，如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，第一时长条件对应于第二放松条件包括的第二子放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第二子放松条件；或者，如果这一个或多个RSRQ中有大于50％的RSRQ均大于第二门限，终端设备就可以确定在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限，此时，如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，第一时长条件对应于第二放松条件包括的第二子放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第二子放松条件；或者，如果这一个或多个RSRQ的平均值(算术平均值或加权平均值)大于第二门限，终端设备就可以确定在第二时长内对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限，此时，如果第一放松条件包括一种放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第一放松条件，或者，如果第一放松条件包括多种放松条件，第一时长条件对应于第二放松条件包括的第二子放松条件，则终端设备确定满足第二子放松条件。其中，第二子放松条件和第一子放松条件可以是同一种放松条件，或者也可以是不同的放松条件。
第一放松条件能够表明终端设备的状态较为稳定，或者表明终端设备的信道条件较好，对于这样的终端设备来说，可能只需较少次数地监听寻呼消息就能正确接收寻呼消息，因此无需过多次数地监听寻呼消息。那么满足第一放松条件的终端设备就可以执行对寻呼消息的放松监听，以节省功耗。
S604、终端设备根据第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息。其中，终端设备在第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
本申请实施例提供了M种放松条件，不同的放松条件对应的放松配置可以相同也可以不同。例如，K种放松条件包括放松条件1，另外还包括放松条件2，放松条件1对应放松配置1，放松条件2对应放松配置2，放松配置1与放松配置2可以相同，也可以不同。终端设备可以周期性或非周期性地确定是否满足K种放松条件中的一种或多种，如果满足K种放松条件中的一种，则终端设备可根据该放松条件对应的放松配置监听寻呼消息；或者，如果同时满足K种放松条件中的多种，则终端设备可根据该多种放松条件中的一种放松条件对应的放松配置监听寻呼消息。K种放松条件包括M种放松条件中的部分放松条件或全部放松条件，K为大于或等于1且小于或等于M的整数。S603和S604以终端设备满足第一放松条件，并根据第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息为例。第一放松条件例如包括K种放松条件中的一种或多种。
第一放松条件属于K种放松条件，自然也属于所述的M种放松条件，第一放松配置属于所述的N种放松配置。也就是说，第一放松条件与第一放松配置 之间的对应关系是网络设备已发送给终端设备的，或者是预配置在终端设备中的，或者是通过协议规定的，终端设备如果确定终端设备满足第一放松条件，就可以确定第一放松条件所对应的第一放松配置。
第一放松条件如果为一种放松条件，且该放松条件对应一种放松配置，则第一放松配置为该放松条件对应的放松配置；或者，在前文介绍了，一种放松条件可以对应一种或多种放松配置，如果第一放松条件对应多种放松配置，那么终端设备可以从这多种放松配置中确定一种，例如终端设备确定了第一放松配置。
或者，第一放松条件如果包括多种放松条件，那么，如果这多种放松条件对应相同的放松配置，则第一放松配置就是这多种放松条件所对应的放松配置；或者，如果这多种放松条件对应的放松配置均不同，或者这多种放松条件中至少有两种放松条件对应的放松配置不同，那么第一放松配置可以是这多种放松条件对应的其中一种放松配置。例如，如果这多种放松条件对应的放松配置均不同，或者这多种放松条件中至少有两种放松条件对应的放松配置不同，终端设备可以选择这多种放松条件中的任意一个放松条件对应的放松配置作为第一放松配置。
第一放松配置例如包括第三时长、第一数量、第一序列号信息或第一周期中的一种或多种。例如，第一放松配置包括第三时长；或者，第一放松配置包括第一数量；或者，第一放松配置包括第一序列号信息；或者，第一放松配置包括第一周期；或者，第一放松配置包括第三时长和第一数量；或者，第一放松配置包括第三时长和第一周期；或者，第一放松配置包括第一数量和第一周期；或者，第一放松配置包括第三时长、第一数量和第一周期，等等。第三时长是一个寻呼传输窗的时长，第一数量是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的个数，第一序列号信息是指终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的PO的序列号(或者称为索引或编号等)，第一周期是终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内监听PO的周期。第一周期的时长可以是寻呼传输窗内相邻两个PO之间的间隔的整数倍。当然，核心网设备确定的第一放松配置还可以包括其他的信息，具体的不做限制。
例如，第一放松配置包括第三时长，第三时长可以小于第四时长，第四时长是正常配置下的一个PTW的时长；又例如，第一放松配置包括第一数量，第一数量可以小于第二数量，第二数量是正常配置下的一个PTW包括的PO的个数，或者说是正常配置下终端设备在一个PTW内需监听的PO的个数，例如第一数量个PO可以是正常配置下的一个PTW内包括的前N个PO或后N个PO(按照时域顺序)，N为第一数量，又例如，第一数量个PO中，每两个在时域上相邻的PO之间的时间间隔(例如称为第一时间间隔)大于第二数量个PO中，每两个在时域上相邻的PO之间的时间间隔(例如称为第二时间间隔)；又例如，第一放松配置包括第一序列号信息，第一序列号信息所指示的序列号可以包括正常配置下的一个PTW所包括的部分PO的序列号，例如，第一序列号信息所指示的序列号可以包括一个PTW内的前半部分PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内的后半部分PO的序列号；或包括一个PTW内的第一个和最后一个PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内其他PO的序列号，需要强调的是这里包括的PO 序列号由网络指示给UE，但指示哪几个PO序列号给UE不做限制；再例如，第一放松配置包括第一周期，第一周期的时长可以大于正常配置下一个PTW包括的两个相邻的PO之间的时间间隔，例如第一周期可以是正常配置下一个PTW包括的两个相邻的PO之间的时间间隔的K倍，K为大于或等于2的整数。
其中，本申请任一实施例所述的部分PO的序列号可以包括一个PTW内的前半部分PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内的后半部分PO的序列号；或包括一个PTW内的第一个和最后一个PO的序列号，而不包括一个PTW内其他PO的序列号，需要强调的是这里包括的PO序列号由网络指示给UE，但指示哪几个PO序列号给UE不做限制。
无论第一放松配置包括第三时长、第一数量、第一序列号信息还是第一周期，其作用都可以减少终端设备监听PO的次数，因此可以认为，终端设备在第一放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
网络设备在发送寻呼消息时，可以按照第一放松配置来发送，或者网络设备也可以按照正常方式发送。或者，由于终端设备是在确定满足放松条件时就自行执行放松监听，而网络设备并不知道终端设备是否满足相应的放松条件，也就不知道终端设备是否进行了放松监听。那么一种比较好的方式是，网络设备在每个PO都发送寻呼消息。例如，如果按照正常的发送方式，网络设备对某个终端设备的寻呼消息原本是从一个寻呼传输窗内的第二个PO开始发送，但如果终端设备执行了放松监听，终端设备很可能会只监听一个寻呼传输窗内的第一个PO，则终端设备就无法监听到寻呼消息。那么为了尽量保证该终端设备能收到寻呼消息，网络设备可以在一个寻呼传输窗内的每个PO都发送针对该终端设备的寻呼消息，以提高终端设备对于寻呼消息的接收成功率。
例如第一放松配置包括第三时长，那么终端设备可以按照第三时长的寻呼传输窗来监听寻呼消息。又例如，第一放松配置包括第一数量，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一数量个PO，至于终端设备究竟监听哪些PO，可以由终端设备自行确定，或者由网络设备指示，或者通过协议规定等。又例如，第一放松配置包括第一序列号信息，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内只需监听第一序列号信息所指示的PO。再例如，第一放松配置包括第一周期，那么终端设备在一个寻呼传输窗内可按照第一周期监听PO。
S605、终端设备确定不满足K种放松条件。这里所述的不满足K种放松条件，是指对于K种放松条件均不满足，或者说，不满足K种放松条件中的任何一种放松条件。K种放松条件包括M种放松条件中的部分放松条件或全部放松条件。
S606、终端设备根据正常配置监听寻呼消息。
其中，S605和S606为可选的步骤，不是必须执行的，在图6中用虚线表示。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备可以周期性或非周期性地确定是否满足所述的K种放松条件。例如终端设备在确定满足第一放松条件后，根据第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息。而在此后终端设备又确定满足K种放松条件 中的第二放松条件，那么终端设备又可以改为根据第二放松条件对应的第二放松配置监听寻呼消息。或者，在此后终端设备确定不满足K种放松条件，即，对于K种放松条件中的每种都不满足，那么终端设备可以恢复对于寻呼消息的正常监听，即，终端设备可以按照正常配置监听寻呼消息，以减小漏检寻呼消息的概率。
在本申请实施例中，如果满足第一放松条件，终端设备就可按照第一放松配置来监听寻呼消息。终端设备在第一放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于终端设备在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数，由于监听寻呼消息的次数有所减少，因此可以减小终端设备的功耗。而且是否满足放松条件可由终端设备自行确定，无需网络设备指示，使得确定方式更为灵活。
考虑一种本申请实施例的实际应用场景。例如，在用户没有使用终端设备(如智能手机、智能手表、或智能手环等设备)的情况下，在一段时间后终端设备仍然减少了不少电量。这是因为，即使终端设备处于RRC空闲态或RRC非活跃态，且没有数据传输，但由于终端设备需要醒来监听PO，且许多监听都是无用功，会导致终端设备消耗多余的功耗，电量减少更快，续航能力变差。可参考图7A，为用户使用的终端设备在第一时刻的剩余电量，例如为90％。如果按照目前的方案，则，在自第一时刻开始的时长A内，虽然用户没有使用该终端设备，但在第二时刻，该终端设备的剩余电量例如变为72％，可参考图7B。其中，第一时刻为时长A的起始时刻，第二时刻为时长A的结束时刻。可以看到，即使用户在时长A内未使用该终端设备，但该终端设备的电量也消耗了不少，这是因为终端设备需要醒来监听PO导致的。在这种情况下，可以采用本申请实施例提供的方法，以节省终端设备的电量，增强终端设备的续航能力。例如可参考图7C，在采用本申请实施例提供的方法后，在时长A内用户未使用该终端设备，那么在第二时刻，该终端设备的剩余电量例如为88％。显然相较于目前的方案来说，本申请实施例提供的方法能够节省终端设备的电量。
图8为本申请实施例提供的通信装置800的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置800例如为终端设备800。
终端设备800包括处理模块810和收发模块820。示例性地，终端设备800可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备800是终端设备时，收发模块820可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块810可以包括处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)。当终端设备800是具有上述终端设备功能的部件时，收发模块820可以是射频单元，处理模块810可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备800是芯片***时，收发模块820可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块810可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块810可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块820可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块810可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S301，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S302、S304和S306，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块810可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S401，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S402、S404、S406和S407，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
再例如，处理模块810可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S501，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块820可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S502、S505、S507和S510，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块820可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块820可以用于执行图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块820是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块820是接收模块；或者，收发模块820也可以是两个功能模块，收发模块820可以视为这两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
其中，处理模块810，用于确定辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
收发模块820，用于发送所述辅助信息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块820，还用于接收第一配置信息和/或第二配置信息；
处理模块810，还用于根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，所述第三配置信息 是根据接收的配置信息确定的。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
关于终端设备800所能实现的其他功能，可参考图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置900的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置900例如为网络设备900。
网络设备900包括处理模块910和收发模块920。示例性地，网络设备900可以是网络设备，也可以是应用于网络设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述网络设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当网络设备900是网络设备时，收发模块920可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块910可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当网络设备900是具有上述网络设备功能的部件时，收发模块920可以是射频单元，处理模块910可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当网络设备900是芯片***时，收发模块920可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块910可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块910可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块920可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块910可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S303，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块920可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S302、S304和S305，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，处理模块910可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S61～S67，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块920可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S402～S404、以及S406，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
再例如，处理模块910可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S61～S67，和/或用于支持本文所描述的 技术的其它过程。收发模块920可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S502、S503、S505、以及S507～S509，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块920的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块820的实现方式的介绍。
其中，收发模块920，用于接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
处理模块910，用于根据所述辅助信息确定第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于所述终端设备监听寻呼消息；
收发模块920，还用于发送所述第一配置信息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块920还用于：
按照所述第一配置信息发送寻呼消息；或，
接收第二配置信息，根据所述第一配置信息和所述第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，并按照所述第三配置信息发送寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
所述终端设备的类型信息；
所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述网络设备为核心网设备，收发模块920，还用于将所述辅助信息和所述第一配置信息发送给服务于所述终端设备的接入网设备。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述网络设备为接入网设备，收发模块920，还用于将所述第一放松配置发送给服务于所述终端设备的核心网设备。
关于网络设备900所能实现的其他功能，可参考图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的示意性框图。示例性地，通信 装置1000例如为终端设备1000。
终端设备1000包括处理模块1010和收发模块1020。示例性地，终端设备1000可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备1000是终端设备时，收发模块1020可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1010可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当终端设备1000是具有上述终端设备功能的部件时，收发模块1020可以是射频单元，处理模块1010可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备1000是芯片***时，收发模块1020可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块1010可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1010可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1020可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块1010可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S603和S605，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1020可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S601、S602、S604和S606，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块1020的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块820的实现方式的介绍。
其中，处理模块1010，用于确定满足第一放松条件，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件；
收发模块1020，用于根据所述第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置监听寻呼消息，终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一放松条件包括如下的一项或多项：
在第一时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值的变化值小于第一门限；
在第二时长内，对参考信号进行测量得到的测量值大于第二门限；或，
所述终端设备的位置是固定的。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第一放松配置包括第三时长，所述正常配置包括第四时长，所述第三时长小于所述第四时长，所述第三时长和所述第四时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
所述第一放松配置包括第一数量，所述正常配置包括第二数量，所述第一数量小于所述第二数量，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述第一数量个寻呼时机为一个寻呼传输窗内按照时域顺序的前N个寻呼时机，N为所述第一数量；和/或，
第一时间间隔大于第二时间间隔，所述第一时间间隔为所述第一数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔，所述第二时间间隔为所述第二数量个寻呼时机中每两个相邻的寻呼时机之间的时间间隔。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1020，还用于接收指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块1020，还用于接收配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或，
所述指示信息用于配置所述第一放松条件，和/或所述第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1020，还用于发送请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
处理模块1010，还用于确定不满足K种放松条件，所述K种放松条件为全部放松条件或部分放松条件，所述第一放松条件是所述K种放松条件中的一种，K为大于或等于1的整数；
收发模块1020，还用于根据所述正常配置监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第一放松条件是K种放松条件中的一种，所述K种放松条件还包括第二放松条件，所述第二放松条件对应于第二放松配置，所述第一放松配置与所述第二放松配置不同，K为大于或等于1的整数。
关于终端设备1000所能实现的其他功能，可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1100的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1100例如为网络设备1100。
网络设备1100包括处理模块1110和收发模块1120。示例性地，网络设备1100可以是网络设备，也可以是应用于网络设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述网络设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当网络设备1100是网络设备时，收发模块1120可以是收发器，收发器可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1110可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当网络设备1100 是具有上述网络设备功能的部件时，收发模块1120可以是射频单元，处理模块1110可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当网络设备1100是芯片***时，收发模块1120可以是芯片(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块1110可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1110可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1120可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
例如，处理模块1110可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如确定允许或不允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息的步骤，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1120可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由网络设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S601和S602，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，关于收发模块1120的实现方式，可参考对于收发模块820的实现方式的介绍。
其中，处理模块1110，用于确定允许终端设备放松监听寻呼消息；
收发模块1120，用于发送指示信息，所述指示信息用于指示允许放松监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述指示信息承载在广播消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在RRC消息中；或，
所述指示信息承载在NAS消息中。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块1120，还用于发送配置信息，所述配置信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的所述第一放松配置；或者，
所述指示信息用于配置第一放松条件，和/或配置第一放松条件对应的第一放松配置；
其中，所述第一放松条件为放松监听寻呼消息的条件，所述终端设备在所述第一放松条件对应的放松配置下监听寻呼消息的次数小于在正常配置下监听寻呼消息的次数。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述配置信息还包括所述第一放松条件与所述第一放松配置之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1120，还用于接收来自所述终端设备的请求信息，所述请求信息用于请求放松监听寻呼消息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述请求信息承载在NAS消息中；或，
所述请求消息承载在RRC消息中。
关于网络设备1100所能实现的其他功能，可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍，不多赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电 路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述各个方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置为终端设备时，图12示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图12中，终端设备以手机作为例子。如图12所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图12中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元(收发单元可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能；或者，收发单元也可以包括两个功能单元，分别为能够实现接收功能的接收单元和能够实现发送功能的发送单元)，将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图12所示，终端设备包括收发单元1210和处理单元1220。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元1210中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元1210中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元1210包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元1210用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元1220用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元1210可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S301，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1220可以用于执行图3所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S302、S304和S306，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元1210可以用于执行图4所示的实施 例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S401，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1220可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S402、S404、S406和S407，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
再例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元1210可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S501，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1220可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S502、S505、S507和S510，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
还例如，在一种实现方式中，处理单元1210可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S603和S605，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发单元1220可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S601、S602、S604和S606，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口；处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时，可以参照图13所示的设备。作为一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图8中处理模块810的功能。作为又一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图10中处理模块1010的功能。在图13中，该设备包括处理器1310，发送数据处理器1320，接收数据处理器1330。上述实施例中的处理模块810可以是图13中的该处理器1310，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块820可以是图13中的发送数据处理器1320，和/或接收数据处理器1330，并完成相应的功能。或者，上述实施例中的处理模块1010可以是图13中的该处理器1310，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块1020可以是图13中的发送数据处理器1320，和/或接收数据处理器1330，并完成相应的功能。虽然图13中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器，但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明，仅是示意性的。
图14示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1400中包括调制子***、中央处理子***、周边子***等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子***。具体的，该调制子***可以包括处理器1403，接口1404。其中，处理器1403完成上述处理模块810的功能，接口1404完成上述收发模块820的功能。或者，处理器1403完成上述处理模块1010的功能，接口1404完成上述收发模块1020的功能。作为另一种变形，该调制子***包括存储器1406、处理器1403及存储在存储器1406上并可在处理器上运行的程序，该处理器1403执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是，所述存储器1406可以是非易失性的，也可以是易失性的，其位置可以位于调制子***内部，也可以位于处理装置1400中，只要该存储器1406可以连接到所述处理器1403即可。
本申请实施例中的装置为网络设备时，该装置可以如图15所示。装置1500包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1510和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit，BBU)(也可称为数字单元，digital unit，DU)1520。所述RRU 1510可以称为收发模块，该收发模块可以包括发送模块和接收模块，或者，该收发模块可以是一个能够实现发送和接收功能的模块。该收发模块可以与图9中的收发模块920对应，或者，可以与图11中的收发模块1120对应。可选地，该收发模块还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线1511和射频单元1512。所述RRU 1510部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 1520部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 1510与BBU 1520可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU 1520为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理模块，可以与图9中的处理模块910对应，或者可以与图11中的处理模块1110对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，生成上述指示信息等。
在一个示例中，所述BBU 1520可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络，5G网络或其他网络)。所述BBU 1520还包括存储器1521和处理器1522。所述存储器1521用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器1522用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器1521和处理器1522可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
本申请实施例提供第一通信***。第一通信***可以包括上述的图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的终端设备，以及包括上述的图3所示的实施例至图5所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的网络设备。终端设备例如为图8中的终端设备800。网络设备例如为图9中的网络设备900。
本申请实施例提供第二通信***。第二通信***可以包括上述的图6所示的实施例所涉及的终端设备，以及包括上述的图6所示的实施例所涉及的网络设备。终端设备例如为图10中的终端设备1000。网络设备例如为图11中的网络设备1100。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用 于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图3所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与网络设备相关的流程。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。
应注意，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的 ***、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的***、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的计算机可读存储介质，可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于：计算机可读介质可以包括随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read only memory，EEPROM)、紧凑型光盘只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)、通用串行总线闪存盘(universal serial bus flash disk)、移动硬盘、或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此，本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (16)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
    发送所述辅助信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
    所述终端设备的类型信息；
    所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
    所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
    所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
    所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收第一配置信息和/或第二配置信息；
    根据第三配置信息监听寻呼消息，所述第三配置信息是根据接收的配置信息确定的。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
    所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
  6. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法应用于网络设备，包括：
    接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于确定为终端设备配置的寻呼参数；
    根据所述辅助信息确定第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于所述终端设备监听寻呼消息；
    发送所述第一配置信息。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    按照所述第一配置信息发送寻呼消息；或，
    接收第二配置信息，根据所述第一配置信息和所述第二配置信息确定第三配置信息，并按照所述第三配置信息发送寻呼消息。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括第一时长和/或第一数量，所述第二配置信息包括第二时长和/或第二数量，所述第一时长和所述第二时长均为寻呼传输窗的时长，所述第一数量和所述第二数量均为 在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三配置信息包括第三时长，所述第三时长是所述第一时长和所述第二时长中的较大值或较小值，所述第三时长是寻呼传输窗的时长；和/或，
    所述第三配置信息包括第三数量，所述第三数量是所述第一数量和所述第二数量中的较大值或较小值，所述第三数量是在一个寻呼传输窗内需监听的寻呼时机的个数。
  10. 根据权利要求6～9任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述辅助信息包括如下的一项或多项：
    所述终端设备的类型信息；
    所述终端设备的移动状态信息；
    所述终端设备所在的位置信息；
    所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗的时长；或，
    所述终端设备期望的寻呼传输窗中的寻呼时机的个数。
  11. 根据权利要求6～10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备为核心网设备，所述方法还包括：
    将所述辅助信息和所述第一配置信息发送给服务于所述终端设备的接入网设备。
  12. 根据权利要求6～10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述网络设备为接入网设备，所述方法还包括：
    将所述第一放松配置发送给服务于所述终端设备的核心网设备。
  13. 一种终端设备，其特征在于，包括：
    一个或多个处理器；
    一个或多个存储器；
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述终端设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述终端执行如权利要求1～5中任一项所述的方法。
  14. 一种网络设备，其特征在于，包括：
    一个或多个处理器；
    一个或多个存储器；
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述网络设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述网络设备执行如权利要求6～12中任一项所述的方法。
  15. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1～5中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求6～12 中任意一项所述的方法。
  16. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括一个或多个处理器和通信接口，所述一个或多个处理器用于读取指令，以执行权利要求1～5中任意一项所述的方法，或者执行权利要求6～12中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/083367 2020-04-02 2021-03-26 一种通信方法及设备 WO2021197233A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21781906.9A EP4114102A4 (en) 2020-04-02 2021-03-26 COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010257781 2020-04-02
CN202010257781.8 2020-04-02
CN202010419633 2020-05-18
CN202010419633.1 2020-05-18
CN202011636879.0A CN113498165B (zh) 2020-04-02 2020-12-31 一种通信方法及设备
CN202011636879.0 2020-12-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021197233A1 true WO2021197233A1 (zh) 2021-10-07

Family

ID=77929672

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/083367 WO2021197233A1 (zh) 2020-04-02 2021-03-26 一种通信方法及设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4114102A4 (zh)
WO (1) WO2021197233A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023061261A1 (zh) * 2021-10-11 2023-04-20 ***通信有限公司研究院 寻呼检测方法、装置、终端、网络设备及存储介质
WO2024017356A1 (zh) * 2022-07-22 2024-01-25 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 寻呼增强方法、装置及设备

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103888931A (zh) * 2009-04-28 2014-06-25 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼方法、位置更新方法及装置
US20150139153A1 (en) * 2012-07-23 2015-05-21 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Data Transmission Method and System, And Device Thereof
CN106954258A (zh) * 2016-01-07 2017-07-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种寻呼处理方法、装置和寻呼***
WO2018170858A1 (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 寻呼方法和寻呼装置
CN109548081A (zh) * 2017-08-11 2019-03-29 北京展讯高科通信技术有限公司 寻呼组的分配方法及装置、计算机可读存储介质及设备
US20190306829A1 (en) * 2018-03-28 2019-10-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam direction assisted paging
CN110581809A (zh) * 2019-09-27 2019-12-17 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 数据处理方法、多sim卡业务功能管理实体及终端设备

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11540218B2 (en) * 2018-02-26 2022-12-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method for determining timing of transmission, network node, and computer program
US11483895B2 (en) * 2018-04-13 2022-10-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Interaction between WUS and RRM measurement

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103888931A (zh) * 2009-04-28 2014-06-25 华为技术有限公司 一种寻呼方法、位置更新方法及装置
US20150139153A1 (en) * 2012-07-23 2015-05-21 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Data Transmission Method and System, And Device Thereof
CN106954258A (zh) * 2016-01-07 2017-07-14 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种寻呼处理方法、装置和寻呼***
WO2018170858A1 (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 寻呼方法和寻呼装置
CN109548081A (zh) * 2017-08-11 2019-03-29 北京展讯高科通信技术有限公司 寻呼组的分配方法及装置、计算机可读存储介质及设备
US20190306829A1 (en) * 2018-03-28 2019-10-03 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam direction assisted paging
CN110581809A (zh) * 2019-09-27 2019-12-17 腾讯科技（深圳）有限公司 数据处理方法、多sim卡业务功能管理实体及终端设备

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023061261A1 (zh) * 2021-10-11 2023-04-20 ***通信有限公司研究院 寻呼检测方法、装置、终端、网络设备及存储介质
WO2024017356A1 (zh) * 2022-07-22 2024-01-25 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 寻呼增强方法、装置及设备

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4114102A4 (en) 2023-08-16
EP4114102A1 (en) 2023-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN114982317B (zh) 一种寻呼方法及装置
WO2021175126A1 (zh) 一种测量方法、装置及***
CN113498165B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
CN112312589B (zh) 一种节能信号的传输方法、基站及终端设备
WO2022012388A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021197233A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021051364A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及设备
WO2022022591A1 (zh) 一种测量方法及装置
WO2021036569A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US20230379825A1 (en) Terminal, base station, and wireless communication method
WO2021109039A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及设备
WO2021228192A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2021249244A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021213136A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和终端设备
WO2021138854A1 (zh) 一种信号发送、接收方法、装置及设备
WO2021134792A1 (zh) 一种下行传输质量检测的评估时长确定方法及装置
WO2021134763A1 (zh) 一种恢复传输的方法、装置及设备
WO2021031026A1 (zh) 一种下行控制信息dci的传输方法及装置
WO2021197030A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
CN113473596A (zh) 一种寻呼方法、设备及***
CN113382425B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2023241288A1 (zh) 一种唤醒信号传输方法及通信***
WO2021127846A1 (zh) 一种寻呼方法、装置及设备
WO2022257796A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
WO2021228053A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及存储介质

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21781906

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021781906

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220929

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE